PACIFICA
2021 Pacifica
OWNER’S MANUAL
©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada Inc., used under license. Chrysler est une marque
déposée de FCA US LLC ou FCA Canada Inc., utilisée sous le permis. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
Second Edition V1
_RUP_OM_EN_USC
SCAN FOR THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaU. S.
mopar.com/om
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or
scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make
and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only).
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that
are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-247-9753 (U.S.)
or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and
Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian
residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury.
FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices,
such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious
accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Chrysler
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Chrysler
brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend
or use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your
judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................. 9
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 14
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 118
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ...............................................................................................145
5 MULTIMEDIA ..............................................................................................................................209
6 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................ 255
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ..................................................................................................... 321
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................350
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................... 405
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ......................................................................................................413
11 INDEX ..............................................................................................................................................418
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
Symbols Key..........................................................10
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.........10
Symbol Glossary...................................................10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ......................................................................14
Key Fob......................................................... 14
SENTRY KEY ..........................................................18
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................18
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition..................... 18
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED ........................20
How To Use Remote Start ...........................20
To Exit Remote Start Mode ......................... 21
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped ................................................... 22
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped ................................................... 22
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped.............................. 23
Remote Start Cancel Message ................... 23
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ... 23
To Arm The System ..................................... 23
To Disarm The System ................................ 23
Rearming Of The System............................. 24
DOORS................................................................... 24
Manual Door Locks — If Equipped.............. 24
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ................ 25
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry .......... 26
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit —
If Equipped................................................... 28
Manual Sliding Side Door............................ 28
Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped ...... 29
Hands-Free Sliding Doors — If Equipped.... 30
Child Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ................................................... 31
STEERING WHEEL ............................................... 32
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .............. 32
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ....... 32
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED .. 33
Programming The Memory Feature............ 34
Linking And Unlinking The Key
Fob To Memory ............................................ 34
Memory Position Recall............................... 34
SEATS.....................................................................35
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped................................................... 35
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ............... 36
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped................................................... 50
Power Adjustment (Rear Seats) —
If Equipped................................................... 52
Heated Seats ............................................... 54
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped................... 55
Adjustable Armrest (Front Seats) —
If Equipped................................................... 55
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks .......... 55
Head Restraints .......................................... 55
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION .......................59
Introducing Voice Recognition.................... 59
Basic Voice Commands .............................. 59
Get Started................................................... 59
Additional Information................................. 60
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
MIRRORS...............................................................60
Inside Rearview Mirror ................................ 60
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped .. 61
Outside Mirrors ........................................... 61
Driver's Outside Automatic
Dimming Mirror — If Equipped ....................61
Conversation Mirror..................................... 62
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ...................... 62
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature................. 62
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .....................63
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped ... 63
Power Folding Outside Mirrors —
If Equipped ................................................... 63
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) ......................................................64
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink® .................................................. 64
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels........64
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device .............. 64
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener................................................. 65
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device.................................. 66
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button...........................................................66
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming..... 67
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................ 68
Multifunction Lever...................................... 68
Headlight Switch.......................................... 68
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped................................................... 68
High/Low Beam Switch............................... 69
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped ......... 69
Flash-To-Pass............................................... 69
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .......... 69
Headlights On With Wipers —
If Equipped................................................... 70
Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped........... 70
Lights-On Reminder..................................... 70
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .................. 70
Turn Signals ................................................. 70
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ............. 71
Battery Protection ....................................... 71
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................ 71
Interior Courtesy Lights .............................. 71
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS .............. 72
Windshield Wiper Operation ...................... 73
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped............ 74
Rear Wiper And Washer .............................. 74
CLIMATE CONTROLS ...........................................75
Automatic Climate Control
Descriptions And Functions........................ 75
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions .............................................. 81
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped .................................................. 87
Climate Voice Commands........................... 87
Operating Tips ............................................. 88
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT..............89
Storage......................................................... 89
Sun Screens — If Equipped......................... 93
USB/AUX Control ........................................ 94
Power Outlets .............................................. 96
Power Inverter — If Equipped ..................... 97
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped ........................ 98
Smoker's Package Kit — If Equipped ......... 98
WINDOWS .............................................................98
Power Windows ........................................... 98
Automatic Window Features....................... 99
Rest Auto Up ..............................................100
Wind Buffeting ...........................................100
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED......... 100
Opening And Closing The Sunroof ............101
Opening And Closing
The Power Sunshade — If Equipped.........101
Pinch Protect Feature................................102
Venting Sunroof .........................................102
Ignition Off Operation ................................102
Sunroof Maintenance................................102
HOOD................................................................... 102
Opening ......................................................102
Closing........................................................103
LIFTGATE............................................................. 103
To Unlock/Open The Liftgate ....................103
To Lock/Close The Liftgate .......................104
Power Liftgate — If Equipped ....................104
Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped ...........106
Cargo Area Features..................................107
STOW ‘N PLACE ROOF RACK —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 113
Deploying The Crossbars...........................114
Stowing The Crossbars..............................115
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .....................................118
Instrument Cluster Descriptions...............120
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...................121
Instrument Cluster Display Location
And Controls...............................................121
Oil Life Reset..............................................122
KeySense Cluster Messages —
If Equipped.................................................124
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ....125
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped ...............................132
TRIP COMPUTER ...............................................133
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................134
Red Warning Lights ...................................134
Yellow Warning Lights ...............................137
Yellow Indicator Lights ..............................141
Green Indicator Lights...............................141
White Indicator Lights ...............................142
Blue Indicator Lights..................................142
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II.....142
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity................................143
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS.........................................................143
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE..................................... 145
Normal Starting ........................................145
AutoPark.....................................................146
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) .........................149
After Starting — Warming Up The
Engine ........................................................149
If Engine Fails To Start .............................149
To Turn Off The Engine Using
ENGINE START/STOP Button ....................149
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED........ 150
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 150
PARKING BRAKE ............................................... 151
Electric Park Brake (EPB) .........................151
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ........................... 154
Ignition Park Interlock ...............................155
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
(BTSI) System.............................................155
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission.......156
Gear Ranges ..............................................156
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED ..... 160
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION ........................ 160
POWER STEERING ............................................ 160
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ........... 161
Autostop Mode...........................................161
Possible Reasons The Engine
Does Not Autostop.....................................162
To Start The Engine While In Autostop.....162
To Manually Turn Off The
Stop/Start System .....................................163
To Manually Turn On The
Stop/Start System .....................................163
System Malfunction...................................163
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED ...163
Cruise Control — If Equipped.....................164
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) —
If Equipped ................................................165
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .................................. 175
ParkSense Sensors ...................................177
ParkSense Display.....................................177
ParkSense Warning Display......................180
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........181
Service The ParkSense Park
Assist System.............................................181
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............182
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....182
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED .......................................................183
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
Active Park Assist System .........................183
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
Assistance Operation ................................184
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ............................187
LaneSense Operation................................187
Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...................188
LaneSense Warning Message ..................188
Changing LaneSense Status.....................189
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA .............190
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ......................................................191
FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED...................194
REFUELING THE VEHICLE..................................195
VEHICLE LOADING ............................................195
Certification Label .....................................195
TRAILER TOWING .............................................. 197
Common Towing Definitions.....................197
Trailer Hitch Classification ........................ 199
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ..........200
Vehicle Loading Chart ............................... 200
Trailer And Tongue Weight .......................202
Towing Requirements ..............................202
Towing Tips ...............................................205
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) ................................... 206
Towing This Vehicle Behind
Another Vehicle..........................................206
DRIVING TIPS ..................................................... 207
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ....................207
Driving Through Water .............................207
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ....................................... 209
CYBERSECURITY ............................................... 209
UCONNECT SETTINGS ....................................... 210
Customer Programmable Features .........211
UCONNECT THEATER — UCONNECT 5/5 NAV
WITH 10.1-INCH DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED) ..... 234
Uconnect Theater Overview ......................234
Getting Started...........................................234
Accessing The System From The
Uconnect System.......................................234
Uconnect Theater Controls .......................235
Accessing The System From The
Uconnect Theater Rear Screens...............235
Pairing The Remote ...................................236
Unpairing The Remote...............................236
Media Sources ...........................................237
Uconnect Theater Remote Control ...........238
Uconnect Theater Home Screen
And Controls...............................................239
Play A DVD/Blu-ray™ Or USB Media File
From Uconnect System .............................240
Disc Menu ..................................................241
Blu-ray™ Controls – Disc-Specific
Functions....................................................241
Uconnect Theater Apps.............................242
Using The Rear Video USB Port ................243
Play Video Games......................................244
Headphones Operation .............................244
Display Settings .........................................246
Listening To Audio With The
Screen Closed............................................246
Rear Climate Controls ...............................246
Accessibility — If Equipped........................248
Wireless Streaming — If Equipped............248
BD And DVD Region Codes .......................250
Product Agreement....................................251
FCC/IC Regulatory Notices........................253
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ....254
Regulatory And Safety Information...........254
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ............................................ 255
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 255
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...256
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ........................ 262
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped.................................................262
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped ...........................267
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)... 270
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................. 274
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ...274
Important Safety Precautions...................274
Seat Belt Systems ....................................275
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...286
Child Restraints .........................................300
SAFETY TIPS ...................................................... 318
Transporting Passengers ..........................318
Transporting Pets ..................................... 318
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................318
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle ........................319
Exhaust Gas...............................................320
Carbon Monoxide Warnings......................320
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ....................... 321
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED ... 321
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 325
Preparations For Jacking ..........................325
Jack And Spare Tire Location....................326
Equipment Removal .................................326
Jacking Instructions...................................327
Road Tire Installation ................................331
Portable Air Compressor — If Equipped....332
Return Inflatable Spare Tire......................333
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ................... 333
JUMP STARTING................................................. 339
Preparations For Jump Start.....................340
Jump Starting Procedure...........................341
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED.....342
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS.......................... 343
MANUAL PARK RELEASE .................................343
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............................344
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ........................346
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models ..................349
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) .................................................349
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) .......................349
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ..................................350
Maintenance Plan .....................................351
ENGINE COMPARTMENT...................................354
3.6L Engine................................................354
Checking Oil Level .....................................355
Adding Washer Fluid .................................355
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................356
Pressure Washing......................................356
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .................................. 356
Engine Oil ..................................................357
Engine Oil Filter..........................................357
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ...........................357
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ...............358
Air Conditioner Maintenance....................358
Body Lubrication........................................361
Windshield Wiper Blades ..........................361
Exhaust System ........................................364
Cooling System ..........................................366
Brake System ............................................369
Automatic Transmission ...........................370
Fuses..........................................................371
Bulb Replacement.....................................380
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
TIRES .................................................................. 382
Tire Safety Information .............................382
Tires — General Information .....................389
Tire Types ...................................................394
Spare Tires — If Equipped ........................395
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ....................397
Snow Traction Devices .............................398
Tire Rotation Recommendations..............400
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................................... 400
Treadwear ..................................................400
Traction Grades .........................................400
Temperature Grades .................................401
STORING THE VEHICLE ..................................... 401
BODYWORK........................................................ 402
Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......402
Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........402
Preserving The Bodywork..........................402
INTERIORS ......................................................... 403
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................403
Plastic And Coated Parts...........................404
Leather Surfaces .......................................404
Glass Surfaces ..........................................404
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER.................405
BRAKE SYSTEM..................................................405
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ... 405
Torque Specifications................................405
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ......................................406
3.6L Engine ...............................................406
Reformulated Gasoline ............................406
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends .....................407
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex
Fuel Vehicles..............................................407
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications...407
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline..................407
Materials Added To Fuel ...........................408
Fuel System Cautions................................408
FLUID CAPACITIES ............................................409
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS..................410
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ..............412
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE .......................................... 413
Prepare For The Appointment ..................413
Prepare A List.............................................413
Be Reasonable With Requests.................413
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ............................... 413
FCA US LLC Customer Center...................414
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........414
Mexico ........................................................414
Puerto Rico And US
Virgin Islands .............................................414
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .....................414
Service Contract .......................................415
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................. 415
MOPAR® PARTS ............................................... 415
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 416
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .......................................416
In Canada...................................................416
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 416
General Information.......................................... 417
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Chrysler vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC
offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications
carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help
ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated
in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content
introduced throughout the Owner's Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped” or,
if applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for additional information. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle
in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes
to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Chrysler vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts,
and care about your satisfaction.
1
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the
definition of each symbol Ú page 134.
WARNING!
These statements are against operating
procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information
on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 134
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 134
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 135
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
Ú page 135
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 136
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 136
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 135
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 136
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Ú page 136
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 136
Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 137
Red Warning Lights
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 137
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 137
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 137
Yellow Warning Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 137
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 137
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
Ú page 137
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 138
Red Warning Lights
1
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 138
Service LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 138
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 138
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 138
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 138
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
Ú page 138
Service AWD Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 139
Yellow Warning Lights
Service Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 139
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 139
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
Ú page 139
Yellow Indicator Lights
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 141
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target
Vehicle Detected Light — If Equipped
Ú page 141
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Light — If Equipped
Ú page 141
Yellow Warning Lights
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 141
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 141
KeySense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 141
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 141
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 141
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Ú page 141
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 141
Green Indicator Lights
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 142
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 142
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 142
Set Speed Display
Ú page 142
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 142
1
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter-N-Go (if equipped),
Remote Start (if equipped), and remote power
liftgate operation. The key fob allows you to lock
or unlock the doors and liftgate, optional power
liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power
sliding door, from distances up to approximately
66 ft (20 m). When any button on the key fob is
pushed, or when any signal is being transferred
between the key fob and the vehicle, an LED
light on the key fob will flash as an indicator. The
key fob does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system. The key fob also
contains an emergency key, which is stored in
the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the
vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the
key fob become depleted. The emergency key is
also for locking/unlocking the glove
compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if
the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device. This may
result in poor performance.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
Key Fob
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery
can be verified by referring to the instrument
cluster, which will display directions to follow.
NOTE:
A low key fob battery condition may be indi-
cated by a message in the instrument cluster
display, or by the LED light on the key fob. If
the LED key fob light no longer illuminates
from key fob button pushes, then the key fob
battery requires replacement.
The key fob LED light brightness is designed
for indoor light viewing, so the LED light may
not be visible in direct sunlight Ú page 417.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the driver’s front door and
sliding door or twice within five seconds to
unlock all doors and the liftgate. Push and
release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors and the liftgate.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals
will flash and the illuminated entry system will
be activated. When the doors are locked, the
turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
Settings in the Uconnect system can change to
lights only, chirp only, or both.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is
open, the doors can be locked. The doors will
unlock again only if the key fob is inside the
passenger compartment.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the
first push of the unlock button within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 210.
1 — LED Light
2 — Unlock
3 — Liftgate
4 — Left Power Sliding Side Door
5 — Emergency Key
6 — Lock
7 — Remote Start
8 — Right Power Sliding Side Door
9 — PANIC Alarm
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is one
CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a
battery obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket
coin battery dimensions may not meet the
original OEM coin battery dimensions.
Batteries contain harmful chemicals.
Dispose old batteries by placing them in
correct containers according to the law or by
taking them to a dealership, where they will
be handled appropriately.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are
on the back housing or the printed circuit
board.
1. Remove the emergency key by pushing the
mechanical release button on the side of
the key fob with your thumb and then pull
the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Insert a coin or a flat blade screw driver into
the now exposed slot and carefully pry on
both sides to disengage the snaps. Gently
remove the back cover from the fob, being
careful not to damage any of the snaps.
3. Remove the battery by sliding the battery
rearward in its pocket until the battery lifts
up. Remove the depleted battery from the
battery pocket and dispose appropriately.
4. Fit a new CR2032 battery ensuring that the
positive (+) side is facing upwards. Push the
battery into the pocket until it is firmly
seated in place and secured under both
tabs.
5. Align the back cover into its original position
and snap it back in place by pushing it
against the fob until it is seated all around.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell
battery is swallowed, it can cause severe
internal burns in just two hours and can
lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swal-
lowed or placed inside any part of the body,
seek immediate medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from
children. If the battery compartment does
not close securely, stop using the product
and keep it away from children.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
KeySense Features — If Equipped
This feature provides the vehicle owner with the
ability to customize vehicle settings that can be
applied to determine the driving experience for
other drivers of the vehicle. The vehicle settings
are protected by a unique 4-digit PIN, which the
vehicle owner creates when accessing the
specific settings for the first time.
KeySense also has additional features that are
always enabled when the specific key is in use
that cannot be set by the vehicle owner. While
this specific key fob is in use, the vehicle will
respond accordingly to the customized vehicle
settings and mandatory features. This includes
enhanced driving assistance features,
increased driver alerts, and the locking of
certain optional features. These settings can be
selected within the Uconnect system
Ú page 210.
KeySense Key Fob
KeySense Unique Splash Screen
At start-up the KeySense splash screen should
inform the driver that the vehicle will be
functioning in KeySense mode when the
KeySense key is in use.
Start Up Display Features
Unique splash screen graphic
Telltale illuminated
After unique splash screen, and after stored
messages are cycled, then start-up
KeySense messages (Range & Max Speed)
are displayed
CAUTION!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF position.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The following features are always enabled when
this key is in use:
Entertainment audio muted if front occupied
seat belts are not fastened
Consistent seat belt unfastened chime
Maximum radio volume limited to 15 out
of 39
Daytime Running Lights
Headlights On With Wipers
Rain Sensing Wipers
Automatic High Beams
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a key
fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on
for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone
attempted to start the engine with an invalid key
fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to
start the engine but there is an issue with the
vehicle electronics, the engine will start and
shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics Ú page 417.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long
as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has four
operating positions; three of which are labeled
and will illuminate when in position. The three
positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The
fourth position is START. During START, RUN will
illuminate.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
(Continued)
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices (e.g. central locking,
alarm, etc.) are still available
ACC
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices are available (e.g.
power windows)
ON/RUN
Driving position
All the electrical devices are available
(e.g. climate controls, etc.)
START
The engine will start (when foot is on the
brake pedal)
The engine only runs in the ON/RUN ignition
position or from a remote start request.
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or depleted battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the
START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
Backup Starting Method
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The key fob may not be detected by the
vehicle Keyless Enter-N-Go system if it is
located next to a mobile phone, laptop or
other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and
prevent the Keyless Enter-N-Go system from
starting the vehicle.
For the proper engine starting procedure, see
Ú page 145.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside
the vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of
328 ft (100 m).
Remote start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather and to reach a comfortable climate in
all ambient conditions before the customer
enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob
may reduce this range Ú page 417.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
Push and release the Remote Start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will
flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start, and
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start
mode for a 15 minute cycle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in
the RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation. Always
remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
Pushing the remote start button a third time
shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button,
and place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run
for 15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power
sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
position before the Remote Start sequence
can be repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
System not disabled from previous remote
start event
Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an
intrusion
Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote
Start system, either push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the
doors, or unlock the vehicle using Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via the door
handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security
system (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of
the 15 minute cycle, push and release the
START/STOP ignition button.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off
with another push and release of the Remote
Start button on the key fob, or if the engine is
allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the climate controls will resume the
previously set operations (temperature, blower
control, etc.).
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will show in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP igni-
tion button.
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the
system will disable for two seconds after
receiving a valid remote start request.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When remote start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
the system will automatically activate front defrost
for 15 minutes or less. The time is dependent on
the ambient temperature. Once the timer expires,
the system will automatically adjust the settings
depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next
section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When remote start is activated, the front and
rear defrost will automatically turn on in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel and driver
heated seat feature will turn on if selected in
the Comfort menu screen within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 210. In warm weather, the
driver vented seat feature will automatically
turn on when remote start is activated, if
programmed in the Comfort menu screen. The
vehicle will adjust the climate control settings
depending on the outside ambient
temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The climate controls will be automatically adjusted
to the optimal temperature and mode settings
depending on the outside ambient temperature.
This will occur until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position where the climate controls will
resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If
Equipped
In ambient temperatures at 40°F (4.5°C) or
below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C)
to 78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be
based on the last settings selected by the
driver.
In ambient temperatures at 78°F (26°C) or
above, the climate settings will default to MAX
A/C, Bi-Level mode, with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
control settings, see Ú page 75.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration
of remote start until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings
will change, and exit automatic operation, if
manually adjusted by the driver while the
vehicle is in remote start mode. This includes
the OFF button on the climate controls, which
will turn the system off.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E-ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When the Remote Start system is active and the
outside ambient temperature is less than 33°F
(0.6°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will
activate. Exiting remote start will resume its
previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will
continue.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote
start or exits remote start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To
Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the
vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the
ignition switch for unauthorized operation.
When the alarm is activated, the interior
switches for door locks, power sliding doors and
power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security
system provides both audible and visible
signals. If something triggers the alarm, the
Vehicle Security system will provide the
following audible and visible signals: the horn
will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals
will flash, and the vehicle security light in the
instrument cluster will flash.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the OFF position
Ú
page 145.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry, make sure
the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry door handle with a valid key
fob available in the same exterior zone
Ú page 26.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle (if
equipped) Ú page 26.
Hands-Free Liftgate Passive Entry activation
(if equipped).
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the
OFF position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry, push the
keyless ignition START/STOP ignition
button (requires at least one valid key fob
in the vehicle).
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm
the Vehicle Security system.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed
during power liftgate entry. Pushing the lift-
gate button will not disarm the Vehicle Secu-
rity system. If someone enters the vehicle
through the liftgate and opens any door, the
alarm will sound.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will not
unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to
protect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security
system will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system
will turn the horn off after 29 seconds, 5
seconds between cycles, up to 8 cycles if the
trigger remains active and then the Vehicle
Security system will rearm itself.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on
each door trim panel forward. To unlock the
front doors, pull the inside door handle to the
first detent or rotate the door lock button until
the ribbing is visible. To unlock the rear doors,
rotate the door lock button until the red
indicator is visible.
Manual Front Door Lock Location
Manual Door Lock Knob
1 — Manual Door Lock
2 — Door Handle
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
(Continued)
Manual Rear Door Lock Location
If the door lock button is locked (no ribbing is
visible) when you shut the door, the door will
lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE:
The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the liftgate.
POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
A power door lock switch is on each front door
trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the
doors.
Driver Power Door Lock Switches
If you push the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and
any front door is open, the power locks will not
operate. This prevents you from accidentally
locking your keys in the vehicle. Placing the
ignition in the OFF position or closing the door
will allow the locks to operate. A chime will
sound if the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
position and a door is open, as a reminder to
place the ignition in the OFF position and
remove the key fob.
1 — Door Handle
2 — Manual Door Lock
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the
event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors
before you drive as well as when you park
and leave the vehicle.
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE
E
NTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and
a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key
fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off
through the Uconnect system Ú page 210.
The key fob may not be detected by the
vehicle passive entry system if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other elec-
tronic device; these devices may block the
key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
passive entry handle from locking/unlocking
the vehicle.
If set by the customer in the Uconnect
Settings, unlocking with Passive Entry will
initiate illuminated approach (low beams,
license plate lamp, position lamps) for the
time 0, 30 (default), 60 or 90 seconds.
Passive Entry also initiates two flashes of the
turn lamps.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle,
the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and will arm the security
system (if equipped).
The sliding side doors can be unlocked from
the outside using the hands-free or Passive
Entry system.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side:
With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
door handle, grab the handle to unlock the
vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door handle will
unlock the driver’s side doors (driver/sliding
door) automatically. Grabbing the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors
and the liftgate automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will rotate when the door is
unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will
unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle, depending on the
selected setting in the Uconnect system
Ú page 210.
All doors will unlock when the front
passenger door handle is grabbed regardless
of the driver’s door unlock preference
setting.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a key fob inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an
automatic door unlock feature.
There are three situations that trigger a
FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid key fob
while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will
be executed. If it finds a key fob inside the car,
and it does not find any key fob outside the car,
then the car will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
the vehicle, and no valid key fob is detected
outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
the doors when any of the following conditions
are met:
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then the
doors are closed.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either
Passive Entry door handle.
NOTE:
On the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the
key fob can be locked in the vehicle.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, cycle the handle to open the liftgate and
pull the liftgate open.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, push the door handle lock button to
lock all four doors and the liftgate.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle button. This could unlock the
door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or
unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry
door handle. This is done to allow you to
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle, without the vehicle unlocking.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is depleted.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the key fob lock button, or the lock button
located on the vehicle’s interior door panel
Ú page 417.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature
unlocks all of the vehicle doors when any door
is opened. This will occur only after the gear
selector has been placed into the PARK
position, after the vehicle has been driven (the
gear selector has been placed out of PARK and
all doors closed).
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature
will not operate if there is any manual operation
of the door locks (lock or unlock).
This feature can be turned on or off in the
Uconnect system Ú page 210.
MANUAL SLIDING SIDE DOOR
The sliding door may be opened from the inside
or the outside. Pull outward on the exterior
handle to open the sliding door. The sliding door
inside handle functions by rocking forward and
back. Rocking the handle backwards opens the
door and rocking forward releases the hold
open latch in order to close the door.
Side Door Handle And Lock Functions
To keep your door operating properly, observe
the following guidelines:
Always open the door smoothly.
Avoid high impacts against the door stop
when opening the door. This is very important
when your vehicle is parked on an incline as
the door will slide faster in the downhill direc-
tion.
There is a hold-open latch that is activated
when the sliding door is fully opened. This
latch will keep your sliding door open on any
incline. To close the sliding door after the
hold-open latch is activated, you must rock
the inside handle forward or pull outward on
the exterior handle.
Always make sure that the sliding door is fully
latched anytime the vehicle is in motion.
NOTE:
The left side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open.
1 — Door Handle
2 — Door Lock
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
POWER SLIDING SIDE DOOR — IF
E
QUIPPED
The power sliding door may be power opened or
closed in several ways:
Key fob
Inside or outside handles
Buttons located:
In the overhead console
Just inside the sliding door
On the outside handle
Push the button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to open, close, or
reverse a power sliding door.
The key fob and the overhead console button
will operate the door when the door is locked. All
other ways require the sliding door to be
unlocked. If the vehicle is equipped with
Passive Entry, pressing the button on the
outside handle or Hands-Free feature (if
equipped) will unlock and open the sliding door,
with a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the door handle.
Overhead Console Power Switches
There are power sliding side door switches
located on the B-pillar trim panel, just in front of
the power sliding door for the rear seat
passengers.
To operate the sliding door manually with the
handles or to avoid unintentional operation of
the power sliding doors from the rear seats,
push the power sliding door power off button,
located in the overhead console, to remove
power to the handles and buttons just inside
the sliding doors. The power off LED, in the
overhead console, will be lit when the handles
are manual. When the LED is lit, pushing the
power sliding door power off button will return
the handles to power operation.
NOTE:
If anything obstructs the power sliding side
door while it is closing or opening, the door
will automatically reverse to the closed or
open position and an audible tone will sound,
provided it meets sufficient resistance. The
turn signals will flash with sliding door move-
ments.
If the power sliding door stops in the middle
due to obstacles, it will power open on the
next command.
Driver Side Power Sliding Side Door Switch
1 — Liftgate
2 — Right Sliding Door
3 — Sliding Door Power Off
4 — Left Sliding Door
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Passenger Side Power Sliding Side Door Switch
HANDS-FREE SLIDING DOORS — IF
E
QUIPPED
To open the Hands-Free Sliding Doors, use a
straight in and out kicking motion under the
vehicle in the general location below the door
handle(s). Do not move your foot sideways or in
a sweeping motion or the sensors may not
detect the motion.
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the
sliding door will chime, the hazard lights will
flash and the sliding door will open almost
instantaneously. This assumes all options are
enabled in the Uconnect Settings.
NOTE:
To open the Hands-Free Sliding Doors
requires a valid Passive Entry key fob within
5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle. If a valid
Passive Entry key fob is not within 5 ft
(1.5 m), the door will not respond to any
kicks.
The Hands-Free Sliding Doors will only
operate when the transmission is in PARK.
With every movement of the Hands-Free
Sliding Doors, an audible tone will sound and
the turn signals will flash. You can turn these
alerts on or off in the Uconnect system
Ú page 210.
If anything obstructs the power sliding side
door while it is closing or opening, the door
will automatically reverse to the closed or
open position and an audible tone will sound,
provided it meets sufficient resistance. The
turn signals will flash with sliding door move-
ments.
If the power sliding doors encounter multiple
obstructions within the same cycle, the
system will automatically stop.
WARNING!
Personal injury or cargo damage may occur
if caught in the path of the sliding door.
Make sure the door path is clear before
closing the door.
Before driving off, check the instrument
cluster for a sliding door or door open
message or warning indicator. Failure to do
this could result in unintentionally leaving
the sliding door open while driving.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
The Hands-Free Sliding Doors feature may be
turned off through Uconnect Settings
Ú page 210.
NOTE:
The Hands-Free Sliding Doors feature should be
turned off during jacking, tire changing, and
vehicle service.
CHILD PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small
children riding in the rear seats, the sliding
doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door
Lock system.
To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. On the rear of the sliding door, slide the
Child Protection Door Lock control inward
(toward the vehicle) to engage the Child
Protection Door Lock.
Child Protection Door Locks
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite
sliding door.
NOTE:
After engaging the Child Protection Door
Lock, always test the inside door handle with
the sliding door closed to make certain the
Child Protection Door Lock is in the locked
position.
After disengaging the Child Protection Door
Lock, always test the inside door handle with
the sliding door closed to make certain the
Child Protection Door Lock is in the unlocked
position.
The inside door handle will not open the
sliding door when the Child Protection Door
Lock is engaged.
The power sliding door will operate from the
switch located just inside the sliding door,
regardless of the Child Protection Door Lock
lever position.
To avoid unintentional operation of the power
sliding door from the rear seats, push the
Sliding Door Power Off button, located in the
overhead console. When the overhead
console power OFF LED is lit, the sliding door
may not be power opened or closed by
pushing the buttons just inside the sliding
doors or pulling on the handles.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the sliding doors
cannot be opened from the inside door
handle when the Child Protection Door Locks
are engaged.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control
outward (away from the vehicle) to
disengage the Child Protection Door Lock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite
sliding door.
NOTE:
After disengaging (or engaging) the Child
Protection Door Lock, always test the inside
door handle with the sliding door closed to
make certain the Child Protection Door Lock is
in the desired position. The inside door handle
will open the sliding door when the Child Protec-
tion Door Lock is disengaged.
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
tilt/telescoping lever is located left of the
steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the lever
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or
downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock
the steering column in position, push the lever
upward until fully engaged.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF
E
QUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will operate for an
average of 80 minutes or more before
automatically shutting off. This time may vary
depending on the temperature of the
environment. The heated steering wheel can
shut off early or may not turn on when the
steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located within the Uconnect system.
Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 22.
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two
different memory profiles for easy recall
through a memory switch. Each memory profile
saves desired position settings for the following
features:
Driver’s seat
Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (on/off) (if
equipped)
Power steering wheel position (if equipped)
Side mirrors (if equipped)
A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs,
each can be linked to either memory position
1 or 2.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Uconnect 5
radio, memory settings will be linked to the
driver profiles in the radio, in addition to
several other features (radio presets, home
screens, settings, navigation, phone, etc)
Ú page 210.
The Driver Memory Settings switch is located on
the driver door, next to the door handle, and
consists of three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate
the memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two saved memory profiles.
Driver Memory Switch
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-
ical conditions must exercise care when
using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
1 — Memory Profile Button 1
2 — Memory Profile Button 2
3 — Set Button
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the
selected profile from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN
position (do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside
mirrors and radio station presets).
3. Push the set (S) button on the memory
switch, and then push the desired memory
button (1 or 2) within five seconds. The
instrument cluster display will show which
memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle
in PARK.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE KEY FOB
T
O MEMORY
Your key fob can be programmed to recall one
of two saved memory profiles by pushing the
unlock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fob you must
select the “Personal Settings Linked to Key
Fob” feature through the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 210.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push
and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch.
4. Push and release button (1) or (2)
accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2)
will display in the instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, and then,
within 10 seconds, pushing the unlock button
on the key fob.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
The vehicle speed must be less than or equal
to 5 mph (8 km/h) to recall memory positions.
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), a message will
be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Uconnect 5
radio, the memory settings can be linked to
driver profiles on the radio. Changing driver
profiles will also recall the linked memory
settings if the conditions are met
Ú page 210.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or
two, push the desired memory button (1 or 2) on
the driver's door or the unlock button on the key
fob linked to the desired memory position.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the
memory buttons on the driver's door during a
recall (S, 1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the
driver's seat stops moving. A delay of one
second will occur before another recall can be
selected.
NOTE:
Pushing the mirror adjust switch will cancel the
memory mirror recall.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS)
— I
F EQUIPPED
Manual Front Adjuster
Both front seats are adjustable forward or
rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle
is located under the seat cushion at the front
edge of each seat.
Manual Seat Adjustment
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle
and slide the seat forward or rearward. Release
the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure
that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. The
seat belt might not be adjusted properly
and you could be injured. Adjust the seat
only while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt and be seriously or
even fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Handle
2 — Height Adjustment
3 — Recline Lever
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or
lowered by using a lever, located on the
outboard side of the seat. Pump the lever
upward to raise the seat height or pump the
lever downward to lower the seat height.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
For models equipped with manual seats, the
recline lever is located on the outboard side of
the seat.
Manual Recline Lever
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever and
push back to the desired position and release
the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to
return the seatback to its normal position. Using
body pressure, lean forward and rearward on
the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
Manual Forward/Rearward Adjustment —
Quad Seats (If Equipped)
Both second row seats are adjustable forward
or rearward. The manual seat adjustment
handle is located under the seat cushion at the
front edge of each seat.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. The
seat belt might not be adjusted properly
and you could be injured. Adjust the seat
only while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt and be seriously or
even fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Manual Rear Seat Adjuster
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle
and slide the seat forward or rearward. Release
the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure
that the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Recline — Quad Seats
Recline Lever
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever,
and push back to the desired position and
release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever
to return the seatback to its normal position.
Using body pressure, lean forward and rearward
on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
The second row bench seat can accommodate
two passengers, while providing easy access to
the third row seats without any folding of the
second row seats.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To recline the seatback, lean forward slightly,
lift the recline lever located on the outboard
side of the seat cushion, and push back to the
desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback
to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the
seatback has latched.
Recline Lever
The bench seat does not stow in the floor, but is
removable for added cargo space.
Removing The Bench Seat
1. Adjust the driver and passenger seats
forward to allow room for the bench seat
removal.
2. Raise the armrest completely, then lift the
recline lever located on the outboard side of
the seat to fold the seatback flat against the
seat cushion.
Folded Position
3. Pull the release strap located behind the
seat, in the center near the floor to release
the latches.
Release Strap Location
4. Once the latches are released, tilt the entire
seat toward the front of the vehicle. The
seat can now be removed through either
sliding side door, or through the liftgate.
Tilt Bench Seat Forward
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE:
Due to the weight of the bench seat, it is
recommended that two people are utilized
for its removal.
When storing the removed bench seat, it is
important to keep the seatback in the folded
position.
Reinstalling The Bench Seat
1. To reinstall the bench seat, align the seats
front attachments into the detent positions
on the floor.
2. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seatback into
its original position.
NOTE:
Push downward to ensure the rear latches are
in the locked position.
3. Lift the recline handle and return the
seatback to the seating position.
Second Row Removable 8th Seat — If
Equipped
While the 8th seat does not stow in the floor, it
is foldable and removable for added cargo
space.
Second Row 8th Seat Fold Flat Strap
The release strap is located on the front of the
seat, near the floor. To remove the seat, pull the
release strap to release the rear latches. The
seat assembly can now be removed from the
vehicle by moving it in a rearward direction from
the detent positions in the floor.
Release Strap
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become
loose. Personal injuries could result.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Seat can be removed easier with one outboard
seat stowed in the load floor.
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the
detent positions on the floor. Tilt seat rearward
to lock the seatback into its original position.
In Floor Detent Guides
Fold-Flat — Quad Seats
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full
upward position and push the seatback forward
until it rests on the seat cushion.
Fold-Flat Seat Recline Lever
NOTE:
The seatback may lock into the fold-flat posi-
tion. Use the recline lever to unlock the seat-
back.
If equipped with Stow ‘n Go seating: when
returning the seat to the original position, the
headrest must be folded back to the original
position.
Stow ‘n Go Seating Head Restraint
Easy Entry
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
Easy Tilt Seat — With Or Without Child Seat
Installed
The second row seats can be tilted forward for
easy entry into the third row with or without a
child seat installed.
1.. Located in the seatback of the second row
seat is a lever (or handle for Stow ‘n Go
seats) that provides easier access to the
third row by tilting the seat forward.
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become
loose. Personal injuries could result.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
2. Slide the lever upwards, or if equipped, pull
the handle forward, to unlock the seatback.
Lift Easy Tilt Seat Lever (If Equipped)
Pull Easy Tilt Seat Handle (If Equipped)
3. Push on seatback to slide seat forward to
access the third row.
Easy Tilt Seat
Easy Tilt With Child Seat Installed
4. To put the seat back into original position,
just pull back on the seatback and lock the
seat into position.
Easy Entry — With The Seat Folded Flat
The seats can be folded and tilted for more
accessibility for passengers to enter and exit
the third row.
1. Without a child seat installed, you can fold
the seat by pulling the recliner handle on
the bottom part of the seat. Before pulling
the recliner lever, make sure the arm rests
are folded up.
Recliner Lever
WARNING!
Do not use this feature with a child in seat.
Serious injury or death may occur.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. To put it back into position, pull back on the
folded seat and make sure that it locks into
position. Then, pull the seatback toward the
back and fold down the arm rests.
Exit For Third Row Passengers — Stow ‘n Go
Seats Only
If the second row is equipped with Stow ‘n Go,
third row passengers can pull on the strap and
push the seat forward for folding the seatback
down and tilting the seat to the floor for an easy
exit.
Pull Strap For Third Row Passengers
NOTE:
This process is for when there is no child seat
installed. Use the easy entry lever if a child seat
is installed.
Second Row Removable Quad Seat
The second row quad seats, not equipped with
the Stow ‘n Go feature, are removable for added
cargo space.
Removing Seat
1. Adjust seat to the full rearward position.
2. Lift the recline lever to fold the seatback flat
against the seat cushion.
Lift Recline Lever And Fold Seatback Flat
NOTE:
Push downward on the seatback to make sure
it is in the locked position.
3. The release strap is located on the front of
the seat, near the floor.
Seat Release Strap
4. To remove the seat, pull the release strap to
release the rear latches.
5. Tilt the back of the seat to the upward
position.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Tilt Seat Forward
6. The seat assembly can now be removed
from the vehicle. Grab the front seatback
edge located near the head restraint and
the grab the bar on the rear side of the seat
cushion for easy removal.
Seat Removal
Reinstalling Seat
1. To reinstall the seat, align the seat’s front
attachments into the detent positions on
the floor.
In Floor Seat Detents
2. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seat back into
its original position.
NOTE:
Push downward to ensure the rear latches are
in the locked position.
3. Lift the recline handle and return the seat
back to the seating position.
Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If
Equipped
1. Lower the center head restraint down to
the seatback by pushing the button on the
guide and pushing the head restraint
down.
2. Pull release strap marked “1” to release the
anchors.
Release Strap “1”
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become
loose. Personal injuries could result.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull release strap marked “2” and tumble
the seat rearward into the storage bin.
Strap “2”
Stowed Third Row Seat
To Unfold Third Row Seats
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat
out of the storage bin and push the seat
forward until the anchors latch.
Assist Straps
2. Pulling strap “2” releases the seatback to
return to its full upright position.
Strap “2”
3. Raise the head restraint to its upright
position.
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle
could be injured if seats are not properly
latched to their floor attachments. Always
be sure the seats are fully latched.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Always make
sure the head restraints are in their upright
positions when the seat is to be occupied.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Stow 'n Go Seating
On vehicles equipped with Stow 'n Go seating,
the second and third row seats can be folded
into the floor for convenient storage.
Auto Advance ‘n Return — If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with the Auto Advance ‘n
Return feature, the front seat will move forward
automatically to a location that will allow the
second row Stow ‘n Go seat movement, without
interference by the front seat. After the second
row seat is stowed, the front seat will move back
to the previous location once the Auto Advance
‘n Return button is pushed again.
The Auto Advance ‘n Return feature is available
to both the front driver and passenger power
seats (if equipped).
A one-touch Auto Advance ‘n Return button is
located on the B-pillar trim panel, just in front of
the power sliding door.
Auto Advance ‘n Return Button
Using the Auto Advance ‘n Return Feature
NOTE:
The button is only functional when the power
sliding door is open and the vehicle is in PARK.
If the door is not open or the vehicle is not in
PARK when the button is pushed, the front
seat will not move and a message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
If the power sliding door is closing when the
button is pushed, the front seat will not move
and a message will be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster display.
The Auto Advance ‘n Return feature will not
function if the front doors are open.
1. Push and release the Auto Advance ‘n
Return button.
2. Perform the second row Stow ‘n Go seat
movement. Refer to “Second Row Stow ‘n
Go” in this section for further information.
3. Push and release the Auto Advance ‘n
Return button a second time. The front seat
cushion and seatback will return to the
original starting location.
NOTE:
To abort seat operation while seat is in
motion, push the Auto Advance ‘n Return
button, or push the front power seat button to
stop the seat movement. Pushing the Auto
Advance ‘n Return button again will return
the front seat to the original starting location.
The Auto Advance ‘n Return system includes
obstacle detection. When the system detects
an obstacle, the seat will stop, reverse direc-
tion, and return to the previous location. A
message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster indicating that an obstacle has been
detected.
WARNING!
During power seat operation, personal injury
or cargo damage may occur. Ensure the front
seat is not occupied and the seat travel path
is clear when operating the power seat.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the front seat is already in a location that
will allow space for Stow ‘n Go of the second
row seat, the front seat will not move and a
message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster.
If calibration of the front seat is lost, the seat
will automatically re-calibrate when the Auto
Advance ‘n Return button is pushed. This
may result in the seat cushion moving
forward and downward, before moving to the
location that will allow space for the second
row Stow ‘n Go seat movement.
Second Row Stow 'n Go
For Manual Seats: To stow the seat in the floor,
move the front seat all the way forward using
the manual seat adjustment bar. Move the
seatback all the way forward using the recliner
handle located on the outboard side of the
cushion. Move the seat height to at least mid
position using the height adjuster handle in the
outboard side of the cushion.
For Power Seats: Push the Auto Advance ‘n
Return button located on the B-pillar trim (if
equipped) Ú page 45.
1. To access the storage area, remove the
floor mat (if equipped) and place the lock
rod in the locked position.
Lock Rod
NOTE:
Push the lock rod inward for the locked
position.
Pull outward on the lock rod for the
unlocked position.
For information on storage bin function
with the seats rearward Ú page 91
2. Pull the latch located near the second row
seat to open the floor panel.
Floor Latch
3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward
the front seats while folding the top half
down and rest it against the front seats.
Push Panel Forward
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
4. Remove the plastic storage bin from the
storage area, and store in a safe location.
5. Fold the armrest upward and stow the seat
by grabbing the strap on the lower part of
the seatback, and guide the seat into the
storage area.
Pull Strap
6. Push down on the seatback to lock the seat
into the storage area.
Push To Lock
7. Close the floor by pulling the floor panel
backwards by the bottom corner edge of the
panel.
Extend Floor Panel
8. Push down on floor panel to lock into place.
Push To Lock
9. Readjust the front seat as needed, and
replace the floor mat (if equipped).
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the
seat storage bin covers are not properly
latched:
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie
down.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Unstow Second Row Seats
For Manual Seats: To unstow the seat from the
floor, move the front seat all the way forward
using the manual seat adjustment bar.
For Power Seats: Push the Auto Advance ‘n
Return button located on the B-pillar trim
(if equipped) Ú page 45.
1. To access the storage area, remove the
floor mat (if equipped) and place the lock
rod in the locked position.
Lock Rod
NOTE:
Push the lock rod inward for the locked
position.
Pull outward on the lock rod for the
unlocked position.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row
seat to open the floor panel.
Floor Latch
3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward
the front seats while folding the top half
down and rest it against the front seats.
Push Panel Forward
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be latched and
flat to avoid damage from contact with the
front seat tracks, which have minimal clear-
ance to the cover.
Do not sit on the second row seat when it is
in the stowed position with the seatback
upright otherwise damage to the seat may
occur.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
4. Pull the strap located on the seat and pull
the seat out of the storage area. Push the
seat rearward making sure that it locks into
the floor. Fold the seatback into the upright
position and pull the headrest up.
NOTE:
The seatback may be locked, if it is, it will be
necessary to use the recliner handle to unlock
the back before folding into the upright position.
Pull Strap
5. Replace the plastic storage bin into the
storage area.
6. To position the floor panel back into its
original state, grab the bottom corner and
extend it outward.
Extend Panel
7. Lay the floor panel flat and push down until
it clicks into position.
Push Down To Lock
8. Readjust the front seat as needed, and
replace the floor mat (if equipped).
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle
could be injured if seats are not properly
latched to their floor attachments. Always
be sure the seats are fully latched.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Always make
sure the head restraints are in their upright
positions when the seat is to be occupied.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with eight-way
power seats for the driver and front passenger.
The power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the seat. The switches control
the movement of the seat cushion and the
seatback.
Driver Power Seat Switches
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward by using the seat switch. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the
rear of seat switch, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
in two directions. Pull upward or push
downward on the front of the seat switch, the
front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted
forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch
forward or rearward, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position is reached.
1 — Seat Switch
2 — Seatback Switch
3 — Lumbar Switch
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
The front driver’s seat may be equipped with a
four way lumbar adjustment. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the
equipped power seat. Push the switch forward
or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar
support. Push the switch upward or downward
to raise or lower the lumbar support.
The front passenger’s seat may be equipped
with a two way lumbar adjustment. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of
the equipped power seat. Push the switch
forward or rearward to increase or decrease the
lumbar support.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when
you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
When the ignition is placed in the OFF posi-
tion, the driver seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver
seat position is greater than or equal to
2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when the ignition is cycled out of the
OFF position.
When the ignition is placed in the OFF posi-
tion, the driver seat will move to a position
0.3 inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop
if the driver seat position is between 0.9 –
2.7 inches (22.7 – 67.7 mm) forward of the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously
set position when the ignition is cycled out of
the OFF position.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
when the driver seat position is less than
0.9 inches (22.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. At this position, there is no benefit to
the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry
and Easy Exit positions are stored in each
memory setting profile Ú page 33.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled through the programmable
features in the instrument cluster display
Ú page 121.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped
The power recline feature, located on the trim
panel next to the seat, adjusts the seatback
angle forward/rearward for occupant comfort.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted
forward or rearward. Push and hold the forward
or rearward button, the seat will move in the
direction of the button push. Release the button
when the desired position is reached.
Third Row Power Seat Switch
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Uconnect 5
Radio, the third row power recline buttons can
be locked out using the Third Row Lockout
setting within Uconnect Settings Ú page 210.
Third Row Power Stow ‘n Go Seat — If
Equipped
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located
in the right rear trim panel as part of a switch
bank.
NOTE:
The third row outboard seat belts may interfere
with the power folding of the seat. Place the
seat belt webbing behind the stow clip before
stowing or opening the seat. When the seat is in
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind
the third row stow clip when using the seat
belt to restrain an occupant. The seat belt
will not be positioned properly on the occu-
pant and they could be more seriously
injured in an accident as a result.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
the desired position, remove the webbing from
the stow clip so that it is ready for use. Never
leave the seat belt in the stow clip when it is
used to restrain an occupant.
NOTE:
The outer head restraints will lower automat-
ically as necessary when the power seat
begins to move.
The center head restraint raises and lowers
manually but will not lower automatically.
The head restraint can also be lowered
manually using the pull strap located at the
back of the seat Ú page 58.
The switch is only functional when the liftgate is
open and the vehicle is in PARK.
The rear switch bank allows multiple power
folding and unfolding positions for the third row
seats.
Left and right third row seats can be folded
individually or together. The third row power
folding seat adjusts to the following positions
using the switch bank located on the left rear
trim panel:
Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
To move the selected seat(s) to the normal
(seated) position, push and release the
“Normal” button. The seat will automatically
stop when the Normal position is reached.
To move the selected seat(s) to the stow
position, push and release the “Stow” button.
The seat will automatically stop when the Stow
position is reached.
To move the selected seat(s) back in the
forward or reverse direction, push and hold the
“Fold Forward/Back” button. Release the
button when the desired position is reached.
NOTE:
1. Disconnect the center shoulder belt from
the mini-buckle before attempting to fold/
stow the power third row seats.
2. Before pushing the “Normal” or “Stow”
button, place the outboard seat belt
webbing behind the stow clips, located on
the rear trim panel. When the seat reaches
the desired position, remove the webbing
from the clip so it is ready for use to restrain
an occupant.
Seat Belt Stowage Clip
1 — Open To Normal
2 — Stow
3 — Fold Forward/Rearward
4 — Right/Left Seats/Both Seats
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
3. To abort seat operation while seat is in
motion, push a different seat position
selector switch to stop the seat. Once the
seat stops moving, then the desired
position can be selected.
4. The third row power seat system includes
obstacle detection. When the system
detects an obstacle, the motors will stop
and reverse direction. Should this occur,
remove the obstacle before pushing the
button again.
HEATED SEATS
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are
located in the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO or off heat settings.
The indicator lights in each switch indicate the
level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will
illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for off.
Press the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second
time to turn the LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time
to turn the heating elements off.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 22.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the second row seats are
equipped with heaters. There are two heated
seat switches that allow the second row
passengers to operate the seats independently.
The heated seat switches are located on the
sliding side door handle trim panels.
Second Row Heated Seat Switch
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
You can choose from HI, LO or off heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate
the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will
illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for off.
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating.
Push the switch a second time to select LO-level
heating. Push the switch a third time to shut the
heating elements off.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the
heater will provide a boosted heat level during
the initial stages of operation. Then, the heat
output will drop to the normal HI-level. The
level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
VENTILATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Located in the first row seat cushions are small
fans that draw the air from the passenger
compartment and move air through fine
perforations in the seat cover to help keep the
driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two
speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are
located in the touchscreen.
Press the ventilated seat button once to
choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second
time to choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a third
time to turn the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 22.
ADJUSTABLE ARMREST (FRONT SEATS)
— I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with adjustable
armrests on the front seats. The armrest can be
adjusted up or down.
To adjust the armrest height, push and hold the
button while moving the armrest to the desired
position. Release the button to lock the armrest
into place.
Adjustable Armrest Adjustment Button
PLASTIC GROCERY BAG RETAINER
H
OOKS
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery
bag handles are built into the seatbacks of the
second row rear seats, and if equipped, the
backs of the front row seats. The floor supports
the partial weight of the bagged goods.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are
equipped with four-way head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward.
The front head restraints are also adjustable
forward and rearward. To tilt forward, pull the
top of the head restraint toward the front of the
vehicle to the desired position. To adjust the
head restraint rearward, continue pulling
forward on the top of the head restraint to the
furthest forward position and the head restraint
will return to the upright position.
NOTE:
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the release button and the
adjustment button at the base of each post
while pulling the head restraint up. Seatback
angle may need to be adjusted to fully remove
the head restraint. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and push downward. Then, adjust the
head restraint to the appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
Normal Position
Forward Adjustment
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Head Restraints — Second Row Quad
Seats
The second row outboard head restraints, as
well as the removable 8th passenger seat (if
equipped), may have adjustable head
restraints.
NOTE:
If equipped with Stow ‘n Go seating, the head
restraints are non-adjustable and non-remov-
able. Do not pull on non-adjustable head
restraints when folding the seat.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the release button and the
adjustment button at the base of each post
while pulling the head restraint up. Seatback
angle may need to be adjusted to fully remove
the head restraint. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and push downward. Then, adjust the
head restraint to the appropriate height.
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench
The second row bench seat is equipped with
adjustable head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward.
Bench Seat Head Restraint
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the release button and the
adjustment button at the base of each post
while pulling the head restraint up. Seatback
angle may need to be adjusted to fully remove
the head restraint. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and push downward. Then, adjust the
head restraint to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
For information on child restraint tethering
Ú page 274.
Head Restraints — Third Row
The outboard head restraints can be manually
folded forward for improved rearward visibility.
Pull the release strap to fold them forward.
Release Straps
NOTE:
The head restraints must be raised manually
when occupying the third row.
Do not fold if there are passengers seated in
the third row seats.
The head restraint in the center position can be
raised and lowered for tether routing or height
adjustment Ú page 274.
NOTE:
To remove the center head restraint, raise it as
far as it can go. Then, push the release button
and the adjustment button at the base of each
post while pulling the head restraint up. To rein-
stall the head restraint, put the head restraint
posts into the holes and push downward. Then,
using the adjustment button, adjust the head
restraint to the appropriate height.
Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled
in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints — If
Equipped
For improved visibility, the third row outboard
head restraints can be folded using the
Uconnect system.
Press the “Controls” button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display (if your vehicle
is equipped with a Uconnect 5 radio, select
“Vehicle” and then “Controls”).
Press the Head Restraint Fold button
to power fold the third row head
restraints.
NOTE:
The head restraints can be folded downward
using the Head Restraint button or using the
manual release strap. The head restraints
must be raised manually when occupying the
third row.
Do not fold if there are passengers seated in
the third row seats.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR)
with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your system.
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in
the Apps menus of your 10.1-inch touchscreen,
you have the Uconnect 5 NAV system. If not, you
have a Uconnect 5 with 10.1-inch display
system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
Voice Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate /deactivate
your Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first
push the VR button, wait until after the beep,
then say your Voice Command. You can also
say the vehicle “Wake Up” word and state
you command.
A passenger can press the VR button
shortcut on the radio status bar to also issue
a command.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR button
and saying a Voice Command or saying the
vehicle’s “Wake Up” word and saying a
command from the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Ú page 417.
For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
week) or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is used to allow the
driver to adjust up, down and left, right. The
mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The
mirror should be adjusted while set in the day
position (toward the windshield).
Manual Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the
feature on or off by pushing the button at the
base of the mirror. A light to the left of the
button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the
right of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE:
This feature is disabled when the vehicle is in
REVERSE. If your vehicle is equipped with an
on/off button on the mirror, the mirror will
default to on and can be turned on/off through
the touchscreen.
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin
Radio, Media, And Climate Functions And Send Or
Receive A Text
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Automatic Dimming Mirror
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS — IF
E
QUIPPED
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors and lift the cover.
Illuminated Mirror
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the
center of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve
the optimal view.
DRIVER'S OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC
D
IMMING MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically
adjust for glare from vehicles behind you. This
feature is controlled by the inside automatic
dimming mirror and will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther
away than they really are. Relying too much
on side convex mirrors could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object.
Use your inside mirror when judging the size
or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONVERSATION MIRROR
Located in the overhead console there is a
conversation mirror to view all the passengers
in the vehicle. Push the panel to release the
drop down mirror. Raise the mirror and push to
latch it back in the stowed position.
Conversation Mirror
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The power mirror controls are located on the
driver-side door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
The power mirror controls consist of mirror
select buttons and a four-way mirror control
switch. To adjust a mirror, push either the
L (left) or R (right) to select the mirror that you
want to adjust.
NOTE:
A light in the selected button will illuminate indi-
cating the mirror is activated and can be
adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of
the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
Left and Right side power mirror preselected
positions can be controlled by the optional
Driver Memory Settings Feature Ú page 33.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS FOLDING FEATURE
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be
moved either forward or rearward to resist
damage. The hinges have three detent
positions:
Full forward position
Full rearward position
Normal position
1 — Left Mirror Select
2 — Right Mirror Select
3 — Mirror Control Switch
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 75.
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE — IF
E
QUIPPED
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic
outside mirror positioning which will aid the
driver’s view of the ground rearward of the front
doors. The driver's outside mirror will move
slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The
driver's outside mirror will then return to the
original position when the vehicle is shifted out
of the REVERSE position. Each stored memory
setting will have an associated Tilt Side Mirrors
In Reverse position.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature is not
enabled when delivered from the factory. The
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be
enabled or disabled through the Uconnect
system Ú page 210.
POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The switch for the power folding mirrors is
located between the power mirror switches L
(left) and R (right). Push the switch once and the
mirrors will fold in, pushing the switch a second
time will return the mirrors to the normal driving
position.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the folding feature will be disabled.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and
vehicle speed is equal or greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), they will automatically unfold.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors
if the following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
folding
The mirrors are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded (by hand or by pushing the
power folding mirror switch).
The mirrors come out of the unfolded
position
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal
driving speeds
To reset the power folding mirrors: fold and
unfold them by pushing the button (this may
require multiple button pushes). This resets
them to their normal position.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®)
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates,
lighting or home security systems. The Home-
Link® unit is powered by your vehicle’s 12
Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in
the overhead console or sunvisor designate
the three different HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release
any of the programmed HomeLink® buttons.
These buttons will activate the devices they
are programmed to with each press of the
corresponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located
above the center button.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are
trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the
channels of your HomeLink® before you use it
for the first time.
If you require assistance, please call toll-free
1-800-355-3515 or visit HomeLink.com.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or
until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first
time. Do not erase channels when programming
additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine
whether the device has a rolling code or
non-rolling code.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date.
Typically, devices manufactured after 1995 have
rolling codes. A device with a rolling code will also
have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where
the antenna is attached to the device. The button
may not be immediately visible when looking at
the device. The name and color of the button may
vary slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will
not have a rolling code. These devices will also
not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, follow
the steps below:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using
this procedure. You do not need to erase all chan-
nels when programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1
to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program,
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold
the garage door opener transmitter button
you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the HomeLink® indicator light. The
HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly
and then rapidly. Once this happens,
release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener motor. Firmly push
and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button three
times (holding the button for two seconds
each time). If the garage door opener motor
operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the final
steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final
Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the steps
from the beginning.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
Refer to “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” for the procedure on how
to program HomeLink® to a miscellaneous
device, as it follows the same procedure. Be
sure to determine if the device has a rolling
code, or non-rolling code before beginning the
programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian radio frequency laws require trans-
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal
during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some US gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner. The procedure
may need to be performed multiple times to
successfully pair the device to your HomeLink®
buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that
has been previously trained, without erasing all
the channels, follow the procedure below. Be
sure to determine whether the new device you
want to program the HomeLink® button to has
a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the HomeLink® Indicator light
begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people or pets are in the path
of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage
or confined area while programming the
transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous when inhaled and can cause you
and others to be severely injured or killed.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” and follow all
remaining steps.
CANADIAN /GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/
United States that require the transmitter
signals to “time-out” after several seconds of
transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating
of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®
button, while you press and release (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter every two
seconds until HomeLink® has successfully
accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to
change flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds
or longer in rare cases. The garage door
may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/
device for programming, plug it back in at this
time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
step 2 and follow all remaining steps
Ú page 417.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column. The multifunction
lever controls the turn signals, headlight high/
low beams, and flash-to-pass functions.
Multifunction Lever
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel. The switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
instrument panel lights, interior lights and the
fog lights.
Headlight Switch
From the O (off) position, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise to the first detent for parking
light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second
detent for headlight, parking light and
instrument panel operation.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) — IF
E
QUIPPED
The headlights or LED light bars on your vehicle
will illuminate when the engine is started. This
provides a constant lights on condition until the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. If the
parking brake is applied, the Daytime Running
Lights (DRLs) will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running
Lights can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect system Ú page 210.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running
Lights may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on
one side of the vehicle (when a turn signal is
activated on that side), or on both sides of
the vehicle (when the hazard warning lights
are activated).
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the
instrument panel to switch the headlights to
high beams. Pulling the multifunction lever
back will turn the low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam system provides
increased forward lighting at night by
automatically controlling the high beams
through the use of a camera mounted on the
windshield. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from
high beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film and other obstruc-
tions on the windshield or camera lens will
cause the system to function improperly.
To Activate
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON”
through the Uconnect system
Ú
page 210.
2. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the
AUTO position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you
to switch the headlights to the high beam
position. Refer to “Multifunction Lever” in
this section for further information.
NOTE:
This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at, or above 16 mph (25 km/h).
To Deactivate
Perform either of the following steps to
deactivate the Automatic High Beam system.
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — OFF”
through the Uconnect system
Ú
page 210.
2. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to
switch the headlights from the high beam to
the low beam position.
3. Rotate the headlight switch counter-
clockwise from the AUTO to the on position.
NOTE:
Once active, the Automatic High Beam system
will stop functioning below 12 mph (20 km/h).
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction
lever toward you. This will cause the high beam
headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the
lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns your headlights
on or off based on ambient light levels. To turn
the system on, turn the headlight switch to the
extreme clockwise position aligning the
indicator with the AUTO on the headlight switch.
When the system is on, the Headlight Time
Delay feature is also on. This means your
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds
after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
To turn the automatic system off, turn the
headlight switch counterclockwise to the O (off)
position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the Automatic mode.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEADLIGHTS ON WITH WIPERS — IF
E
QUIPPED
When your headlights are in the AUTO mode
and the engine is running, the headlights will
automatically turn on when the wiper system is
also turned on. Headlights on when windshield
wipers are on may be found on vehicles
equipped with an automatic headlight system.
NOTE:
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off through the Uconnect system
Ú page 210.
HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides the safety of headlight
illumination for up to 90 seconds after exiting
your vehicle.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition
in the OFF position while the headlights are still
on. The 90 second delay interval begins when
headlight switch is turned off. If the headlights
or parking lights are turned back on or the
ignition is placed in the ON position, the delay
will be cancelled.
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose
to have the headlights remain on for 30, 60, or
90 seconds or not remain on. You can change
the timer setting through the Uconnect system
Ú page 210.
If the headlights are turned off before the
ignition, they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The headlights must be turned off within 45
seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF posi-
tion to activate this feature.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or the parking lights are left on
after the ignition is placed in the OFF position,
the vehicle will chime when the driver's door is
opened.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and
push the headlight switch control knob. Pushing
the headlight switch control knob a second time
will turn the front fog lights off.
Fog Light Switch
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each
side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec-
tive outside light bulb.
Turn Signal Warning
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle
has traveled for about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the
turn signals on, a chime will sound and a
message will display in the cluster to alert the
driver.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal (right or left) will flash three times then
automatically turn off.
BATTERY PROTECTION
This feature provides battery protection to avoid
wearing down the battery if the headlights or
parking lights are left on for extended periods of
time when the ignition is in the OFF position.
After eight minutes of the ignition being in the
OFF position and the headlight switch in any
position other than OFF or AUTO, the lights will
turn off automatically until the next cycle of the
ignition or headlight switch.
The battery protection feature will be disabled if
the ignition is placed in any position other than
OFF during the eight minute delay.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy light switches are used to turn the
courtesy lights on/off.
Courtesy Light Switches
To operate the courtesy lights, push either the
driver or passenger light switch.
NOTE:
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
interior lights are turned off. This will prevent
the battery from discharging once the doors
are closed.
If a light is left on, it will automatically be
turned off approximately 10 minutes after
the ignition is in the OFF position.
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If
Equipped
Located above the rear passengers are courtesy/
reading lights. The lights turn on when a front
door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened. If
your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on when the
unlock button on the key fob is pushed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading
lights. Push the lens to turn these lights on while
inside the vehicle. Push the lens a second time
to turn each light off.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or
downward to increase or decrease the
brightness of the ambient light located in the
door handle lights, under instrument panel
lights, door map pocket lights, and cubby bin
lights.
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
Interior Lighting Off
Rotate the dimmer control on the right to the off
position (extreme bottom). The interior lights
will remain off when the doors or liftgate are
open.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of
the headlight switch, and is located on the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotate
the instrument panel dimmer control upward or
downward to increase or decrease the
brightness of the instrument panel. At the top
detent of the instrument panel dimmer, all the
interior lights will also illuminate. At the bottom
most setting (extreme bottom) interior lights are
turned off (dome off), and the cluster, radio and
instrument lighting go to their lowest dimmable
setting.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness
Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control
upward to the first detent. This feature
brightens all text displays such as the
odometer, instrument cluster display, and radio
when the position lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are
located on the right side of the steering column.
The front wipers are operated by rotating a
switch, located on the end of the lever.
Washer And Wiper Controls
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
The wipers and washers are operated by a
switch within the wiper lever. Rotate the switch
at the end of the lever upward, to the first detent
past the intermittent settings for low-speed
wiper operation. Rotate the switch at the end of
the lever upward to the second detent past the
intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
operation. To turn the windshield wipers off,
rotate the switch within the lever all the way
down to OFF.
Washer And Wiper Controls
NOTE:
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the off position. If the windshield
wiper switch is turned off and the blades cannot
return to the off position, damage to the wiper
motor may occur.
Intermittent Wipers
Use the intermittent wiper when weather
conditions make a single wiping cycle with a
variable pause between cycles desirable.
Rotate the switch at the end of the wiper lever
to the first detent position, and then turn the
switch at the end of the lever to select the
desired delay interval. There are four delay
settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe
interval from a minimum of one cycle every
second to a maximum of approximately 36
seconds between cycles. The delay intervals will
double in duration when the vehicle speed is
10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward
toward you and hold. If the lever is pulled while
on the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn
on and operate for several wipe cycles after the
lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected. If the
lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off
position, the wipers will operate several cycles,
then turn off.
Mist
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and
release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 361.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the
windshield could lead to a collision. You might
not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
freezing weather, warm the windshield with
the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the
windshield and automatically activates the
wipers. Rotate the end of the windshield wiper
lever to one of the four detent positions to
activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from
the windshield wiper lever. Wiper sensitivity
position 1 is the least sensitive, and wiper
sensitivity position 4 is the most sensitive.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or high
position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice or dried saltwater is
present on the windshield.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
silicone may reduce rain sensor perfor-
mance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on
and off through the Uconnect system
Ú page 210.
The Rain Sensing system has protective
features for the wiper blades and arms. It will
not operate under the following conditions:
Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain
Sensing feature will not operate when the
ignition is first placed in the ON position,
when the vehicle is stationary and the
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C),
unless the wiper control on the windshield
wiper lever is moved, the vehicle speed
becomes greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the
outside temperature rises above freezing.
Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is
ON, when the transmission gear selector is in
the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed
is less than 3 mph (5 km/h), unless the wiper
control on the windshield wiper lever is
moved, the vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h) or the gear selector is moved
out of the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the
operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has
been selected, and no other inhibit condi-
tions (mentioned previously) exist.
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
Rear Window Wiper Operation
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring
upwards to operate one of two modes for the
rear window wiper:
First detent — intermittent mode.
Second detent — continuous mode.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Rear Window Washer Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward
activates the rear window washer. If the lever is
pushed while on the intermittent setting, the
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe
cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously
selected. If the lever is pushed while the wipers
are in the off position, the wipers will operate
several wipe cycles, then turn off.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic
Temperature Controls
Uconnect 5 With 10.1-inch Display Automatic
Temperature Controls
Max A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button
on the touchscreen to change the
current setting to the coldest output
of air. The MAX A/C indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the
button again will cause the MAX A/C operation
to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C setting is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release the button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate to change the current
setting. The indicator illuminates
when A/C is on.
NOTE:
If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the
A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system
shall remain active to prevent fogging of the
windows.
If not operating in AUTO mode, the system
will not automatically sense the presence of
fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost
Mode must be manually selected to clear the
windshield and side glass.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost Mode and adjust
blower speed if needed.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Recirculation Button
Press and release the Recirculation
button on the touchscreen, or press
the button on the faceplate, to
change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air. The
Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator
illuminate when the Recirculation button is
pressed. Recirculation can be used when
outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust,
or high humidity are present. Recirculation can
be used in all modes. Recirculation may be
unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed
out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the
mode control selection. Continuous use of
Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended
use of this mode if not recommended.
AUTO Button
Set your desired temperature and
press the AUTO button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate. AUTO will achieve and
maintain your desired temperature by
automatically adjusting the blower speed and
air distribution. AUTO mode is highly
recommended for efficiency. You can turn AUTO
on in one of two ways:
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen
Push the button on the faceplate
Toggling this function will cause the system to
switch between manual mode and automatic
mode Ú page 87.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push
the button on the faceplate to change
the current airflow setting to Defrost
mode. The indicator illuminates when this
feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and
side window demist outlets. When the defrost
button is selected, the blower level may
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and
side window defrosting and defogging.
Performing this function will cause the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) to switch
into manual mode. If the Front Defrost mode is
turned off the climate system will return to the
previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost
Control button to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). An
indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 15 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
Front Temperature Control
These buttons provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red
arrow button on the touchscreen for
warmer temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue
arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Uconnect 5
radio, the temperature can be adjusted by
pressing the Temperature readout on the top
left and right corners of the status bar.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is
illuminated when this feature is
enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front
and rear passenger temperature settings with
the driver temperature setting. Changing the
front or rear passenger temperature setting while
in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount
of air forced through the climate
control system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting
the blower will cause automatic mode to switch
to manual operation. The speeds can be
selected using either the blower control knob on
the faceplate or the buttons on the
touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as
you turn the blower control knob clockwise
from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to
reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. Blower
speed can also be selected by pressing the
blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
The airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Faceplate: Push the button in the center of the
knob to change the airflow distribution mode.
Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of
the Mode Buttons on the touchscreen.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A
slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor,
defrost, and side window demister
outlets. This setting works best in cold
or snowy conditions that require extra
heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn
the Climate Control ON/OFF.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
From The Front ATC Panel—If Equipped
The Three-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) system allows for adjustment of the rear
climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
Press the "Rear Climate" button on the touch-
screen to display the rear climate controls.
Control functions now operate the rear
system.
To return to the Front screen on the Uconnect
system, press the "Front Climate" or “Done”
button on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 4 Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display
Uconnect 5 Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display
Rear Climate Control Button
Press and release the Rear Climate
button to access the rear climate
controls. The indicator will illuminate
when the rear climate controls are on.
Rear Auto Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen to change the current
setting. The REAR AUTO indicator will
illuminate when REAR AUTO is on.
This feature automatically controls the rear
interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow
distribution and amount. Toggling this function
will cause the rear system to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes
Ú page 87.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Rear Lock Button
Press and release this button to lock
out the rear manual temperature
controls from adjusting the rear
temperature and blower settings.
Front Climate Button
Press and release this button to
change the display on the Uconnect
system back to the Front Climate
Controls.
Rear Temperature Control
These buttons provide the front occupants with
the ability to control the rear temperature.
Push the up arrow button on the
touchscreen to increase the
temperature.
Push the down arrow button on the
touchscreen to decrease the
temperature.
NOTE:
When the SYNC feature is active, the
passenger’s temperature will move up and
down with the driver’s temperature.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is
illuminated when this feature is
enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front
and rear passenger temperature settings with
the driver temperature setting. Changing the
front or rear passenger temperature/mode/
blower settings while in SYNC will automatically
exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the
Climate Control system. There are
seven blower speeds available.
Adjusting the blower causes automatic mode to
switch to manual operation. The speeds can be
selected using the buttons on the touchscreen.
Panel Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen
to change the air distribution mode to
Panel Mode. In Panel Mode, air
comes from the outlets in the
headliner. Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of air.
Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side
will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen
to change the air distribution mode to
Bi-Level Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air
comes from both the headliner
outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen
to change the air distribution mode to
Floor Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes
from the floor outlets.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Passenger Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn
the Rear Climate Controls off.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
— If Equipped
The rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
system has floor air outlets underneath the
passengers’ seats, and overhead outlets at
each outboard rear seating position. The
system provides heated air through the floor
outlets or cool, dehumidified air through the
headliner outlets.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the
rear ATC control when the Rear Temperature
Lock button is turned off.
The rear ATC system is located in the headliner,
on the passenger side of the vehicle.
Rear Automatic Climate Controls
1. Adjust the rear blower, rear temperature
and the rear modes to suit your comfort
needs.
2. ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
ATC System will automatically achieve and
maintain that comfort level. When the system is
set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary
to change the settings. You will experience the
greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings. The system automatically adjusts the
temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
AUTO Button
The AUTO button automatically
controls the interior cabin
temperature by adjusting distribution
and amount of airflow. Performing
this function will cause the system to switch
between manual mode and automatic modes
Ú page 87.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear
of the vehicle, push temperature
control up button to raise the
temperature. The rear temperature
settings are displayed in control head.
To change the temperature in the rear
of the vehicle, push temperature
control down button to lower the
temperature. The rear temperature
settings are displayed in control head.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control can be
manually set to off, or any fixed
blower speed by pushing the blower
control buttons. This allows the rear
seat occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the rear of the vehicle. The larger
of the two icons increases blower speed,
whereas the smaller of the two icons decreases
the blower speed.
Rear Mode Control
Push this button on the Rear Climate
Controls to change the air distribution
mode for the rear passengers.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
headliner. Each of these outlets can
be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the
outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner
outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode
is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Rear Climate Control/Blower Off
To manually set the rear blower
controls to off, press the Rear Climate
Control/Blower Off button.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Manual
Temperature Controls
Uconnect 5 With 10.1-inch Display Manual
Temperature Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button
to change the current setting. The
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is
on. Performing this function again will
cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into
manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will
turn off.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C setting is only available on the
touchscreen.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
A/C Button
Press and release the A/C button to
change the current setting. The
indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is
in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase
blower speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the radi-
ator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front
of the radiator and through the condenser.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to
change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air
mode. The Recirculation indicator and
the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes
except for Defrost. Recirculation may be
unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed
out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. The A/C (Air
Conditioning) can be deselected manually
without disturbing the mode control selection.
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging
may occur. Extended use of this mode is not
recommended. On systems with Manual
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode (if
equipped) is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation.
Recirculation is disabled automatically if this
mode is selected. Attempting to use
Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED
on the control button to blink and then turn off.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost
button to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. The indicator
illuminates when this feature is on. Air
comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level may increase. Use
Defrost mode with maximum temperature
settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging. Performing this
function will cause the Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) to switch into manual mode. If the
Front Defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost
Control button to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). An
indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 15 minutes.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
Front Temperature Control
These buttons provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red
arrow button on the touchscreen for
warmer temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue
arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the Sync
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is
illuminated when this feature is
enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front
and rear passenger temperature settings with
the driver temperature setting. Changing the
front or rear passenger temperature setting
while in SYNC will automatically exit this
feature. Pressing SYNC on the touchscreen
while in the Front Climate screen synchronizes
the driver and passenger temperatures only. In
order to SYNC rear temperature to driver
temperature, the touchscreen must be on the
Rear Climate screen.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the
Climate Control system. There are
seven blower speeds available. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower
control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on
the touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as
you turn the blower control knob clockwise
from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to
reduce the blower setting and the large
blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower speed can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the
icons.
Mode Control
The airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
defrost outlets and demist outlets.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Faceplate: Push the button in the center of the
knob to change the airflow distribution mode.
Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of
the Mode Buttons on the touchscreen.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A
slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor,
defrost, and side window demister
outlets. This setting works best in cold
or snowy conditions that require extra
heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn
the Climate Control ON/OFF.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
From The Front MTC Display/Touchscreen
The Three-Zone Manual Temperature Control
(MTC) system allows for adjustment of the rear
climate controls from the front MTC display/
touchscreen.
Uconnect 4 Front MTC Panel Rear Control Display
Uconnect 5 Front MTC Panel Rear Control Display
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
To change the rear system settings:
Press the "Rear Climate" button on the touch-
screen to display the rear climate controls.
The control functions now operate the rear
system.
Press the “Front Climate” button on the
touchscreen to return to the front climate
controls.
Rear Climate Control Button
Press and release this button to
access the rear climate controls. The
indicator will illuminate when the rear
climate controls are on.
Rear Lock Button
Press and release this button to lock
out the rear manual temperature
controls from adjusting the rear
temperature and blower settings.
Front Climate Button
Press and release this button to
change the display on the Uconnect
system back to the Front Climate
Controls.
Rear Temperature Control
These buttons provide the rear passengers with
independent temperature control.
Push the up arrow button on the
touchscreen to increase the
temperature.
Push the down arrow button on the
touchscreen to decrease the
temperature.
NOTE:
When the SYNC feature is active, the
passenger’s temperature moves up and down
with the driver’s temperature.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is
illuminated when this feature is
enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front
and rear passenger temperature settings with
the driver temperature setting. Changing the
front or rear passenger temperature setting
while in SYNC exits this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the
Climate Control system. There are
seven blower speeds available.
Adjusting the blower causes automatic mode to
switch to manual operation. The speeds can be
selected using the buttons on the touchscreen.
Panel Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen
to change the air distribution mode to
Panel Mode. In Panel Mode, air
comes from the outlets in the
headliner. Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of air.
Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side
will shut off the airflow.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Bi-Level Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen
to change the air distribution mode
to Bi-Level Mode. In Bi-Level Mode,
air comes from the headliner and
floor outlets.
NOTE
:
Bi-Level Mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen
to change the air distribution mode to
Floor Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes
from the floor outlets.
Rear Passenger Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn
the Rear Climate Controls off.
Rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC)
The rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC)
system has floor air outlets at the rear right side
of the third row seats and overhead outlets at
each outboard rear seating position. The
system provides heated air through the floor
outlets or cool, dehumidified air through the
headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control buttons
are located on the headliner on the passenger
side of the vehicle.
Rear Manual Climate Controls
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear
of the vehicle, push temperature
control up button to raise the
temperature. The rear temperature
settings are displayed in control head.
To change the temperature in the rear
of the vehicle, push temperature
control down button to lower the
temperature. The rear temperature
settings are displayed in control head.
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control can be
manually set to off, or any fixed
blower speed by pushing the blower
control buttons. This allows the rear
seat occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the rear of the vehicle. The larger
of the two icons increases blower speed,
whereas the smaller of the two icons decreases
the blower speed.
Rear Mode Control
Push this button on the Rear Climate
Controls to change the air distribution
mode for the rear passengers.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic
Temperature Control system through an
intake grille, located in the floor under the
passengers’ seats. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could
overload causing damage to the blower
motor.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
headliner. Each of these outlets can
be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the
outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner
outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the
headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor
outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Rear Climate Control/Blower Off
To manually set the rear blower
controls to off, press the Rear Climate
Control/Blower Off button.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC) — I
F EQUIPPED
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like
the system to maintain by adjusting the
driver and passenger temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric
customer-programmable feature within the
Uconnect system Ú page 210.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) display
will be turned off when the system is being used
in the manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and
keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with
climate control.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say one of the following commands:
“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may
only be used to adjust the interior temperature
of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended
Ú page 410.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling
system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate
Control system when the vehicle is being stored
for an extended period of time, see
Ú page 401.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C (Air Conditioning)
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
have it replaced when needed
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control
to (Panel Mode) ,
(A/C) on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for
a minute to flush out
the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and
set the mode control
to (Panel Mode) .
Cool Sunny
Operate in (Bi-Level
Mode) .
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
Release Handle
Front Door Storage
Both interior front door panels have multiple
pockets for storage.
Overhead Sunglass Storage
At the front of the overhead console, a
compartment is provided for the storage of one
pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the intention to
open the compartment.
Overhead Sunglass Door Latch
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control
to (Floor Mode)
and turn (A/C) on
to keep windows
clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control
to (Floor Mode) . If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to (Mix
Mode) .
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the
bottle holder, they can spill when the door is
closed, burning the occupants. Be careful
when closing the doors to avoid injury.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The door will slowly rotate to the full open
position.
Full Open Position
Instrument Panel Drawer
There is a storage drawer located in the lower
center of the instrument panel. It can be
released by pushing the access button above it.
The drawer is actuator assisted once the access
button is pushed. Pull drawer outward to the
fully open position.
Drawer Access Button
Front Seatback Storage — If Equipped
The front seatbacks have a storage pocket on
some models.
Front Seatback Storage
Umbrella Holder
An umbrella holder has been conveniently
molded into the front door entry scuff moldings.
Umbrella Holder
CAUTION!
The storage drawer must be closed while
driving. If left open during a collision,
additional damage may occur to property or
the drawer mechanism.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
Second Row Floor Storage Bins
There are removable storage bins (if equipped)
located in the areas below the load floor,
located in front of the second row seats.
In Floor Storage Bin
1. To access the storage bins with front seats
in the rearward position, place the lock rod
in the unlocked position so the load floor
can fold upwards towards the seatback.
Lock Rod
NOTE:
Push the lock rod inward for the locked
position.
Pull outward on the lock rod for the
unlocked position.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row
seat to open the floor panel.
Floor Latch
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the
seat storage bin covers are not properly
latched.
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not operate the storage bin covers while
the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie
down.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Storage Bin Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency
Release Lever
As a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin
Cover has an Emergency Release Lever built
into the latching mechanism.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
NOTE:
In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be
opened from inside of the bin by pushing on the
glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage
bin cover latching mechanism.
Coat Hooks — If Equipped
Coat hooks are located along the headliner for
the second and third row seating positions. The
coat hook load limit is 10 lb (4.5 kg). Exceeding
the recommended load limit can cause the coat
hooks to break or disengage from the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be
latched to avoid damage from contact with
the front seat tracks, which have minimal
clearance to the cover. If the storage bin
cover is left in the open position, front seat
adjustment may damage the cover.
WARNING!
Always close the storage bin covers when
your vehicle is unattended.
Do not allow children to have access to the
second row seat storage bins. Once in the
storage bin, young children may not be able
to escape. If trapped in the storage bin, chil-
dren can die from suffocation or heat
stroke.
In a collision, serious injury could result if
the seat storage bin covers are not properly
latched.
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open. Keep the storage bin covers
closed and latched while the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not operate the storage bin covers while
the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie
down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be
latched to avoid damage from contact with
the front seat tracks, which have minimal
clearance to the cover. If the storage bin
cover is left in the open position, front seat
adjustment may damage the cover.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
Coat Hook
SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED
Sun screens are available for second and third
row seating windows. The screens store in the
sill trim panels, and the tops of the windows are
equipped with hooks that the sun screens
attach to when pulled out.
Sun Screen Retracted
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen.
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is
near the top of the window.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the
window, extend the top bar of the sun screen
over the two hooks attached to the top of the
window.
Sun Screen Extended
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab
upward to disengage the hooks, and feed the
screen back into the base sill.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
USB/AUX C ONTROL
There are numerous USB ports located
throughout the vehicle that allow an external
USB device to be plugged into the USB port.
There are four total USB ports: Two Mini-USBs
(Type C) and two Standard USBs (Type A). There
is also an AUX port located in the middle of the
USB ports.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port
may activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped. For further information,
refer to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in
the Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same
time, and both ports will provide charging capa-
bilities. Only one port can transfer data to the
system at a time. A pop-up will appear and allow
you to select the device transferring data.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type
A USB port and another device is plugged into
the Type C USB port, a message will appear and
allow you to select which device to use.
Front Center Stack AUX Jack And USB Ports
There are multiple USB “Charge Only” ports in
this vehicle.
In the center console
In the floor tray
On the back of the front row seats in the
Uconnect Theater Media Hubs (if equipped)
On the back of the front row seats
Above the rear cup holder in the third row of
seats
Charge Only USB In Floor Tray
Charge Only USB In The Center Console
1 — Type C And Type A USB Ports 1
2 — Type C And Type A USB Ports 2
3 — AUX Port
1 — Charge Only Type C USB Ports
2 — Charge Only Type A USB Ports
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
NOTE:
The USB outlet in the bottom of the instrument
panel can be switched from ignition only to
constant battery powered all the time. See an
authorized dealer for details.
Rear Seat USB Charging Port Without Uconnect
Theater
Rear Seat USB Media Hub With Uconnect Theater
3rd Row USB Charging Port
NOTE:
The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge
battery operated USB devices when connected.
Different scenarios are listed below when a
non-phone device is plugged into the smaller
and larger USB ports, and when a phone device
is plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports:
“A new device is now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“Another device is in use through the same
USB port. Please disconnect the first device
to use the second device”.
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may
cause the connection to a previous device to be
lost.
1 — Headphone Jack (Headphone Output Only)
2 — HDMI Port
3 — USB Port (Charge Only)
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp)
power outlets, and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp) USB ports,
that can be used to power cellular phones,
small electronics and other low powered
electrical accessories. The power outlets can be
labeled with either a “key” or a “battery” symbol
to indicate how the outlet is powered. Power
outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
the ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while
the outlets labeled with a “battery” are
connected directly to the battery and powered
at all times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the “battery”
powered outlets should be removed or turned
off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the
battery against discharge.
Depending on the type of center console your
vehicle is equipped with, there is a front power
outlet located either on the bottom of the
instrument panel, or inside the center console.
12 Volt Front Power Outlet (On Center Stack)
12 Volt Front Power Outlet (In Center Console)
In addition to the front power outlet, there is
also a power outlet located in the rear cargo
area.
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear
cargo area.
Rear Power Outlet
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt Power Inverter
outlet located on the right side of the vehicle,
before the third row of seats to convert DC
current to AC current. The Power Inverter can
power cellular phones, electronics and other low
power devices requiring up to 150 Watts. Certain
high-end video game consoles will exceed this
power limit, as will most power tools.
Power Inverter
The Power Inverter turns on when the device is
plugged in, and the ignition is in ON/RUN
position. It turns off when the device is
unplugged or the ignition is no longer in ON/
RUN position.
The Power Inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the Power Inverter
shuts down. Once the electrical device has
been removed from the Power Inverter, it
resets. To avoid overloading the circuit, check
the power ratings on electrical devices prior to
using the Power Inverter.
1 — F95A-F95B USB IP 10A
2 — F85 Cigar Lighter 20A
3 — F60 RR Cargo Power Outlet 20A
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Cigar lighters can be purchased at an autho-
rized dealer through Mopar® parts.
The cigar lighter is located at the bottom of the
instrument panel. Push lighter inward to heat.
After a few seconds, the lighter automatically
returns to its initial position and is ready to be
used.
SMOKER'S PACKAGE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
With the optional authorized dealer-installed
Smoker's Package Kit, a removable ash
receiver is inserted into one of the two
cupholders in the center floor console. To install
the ash receiver, align the receiver so the thumb
grip on the lid is facing rearward. Push the ash
receiver into either of the cup wells to secure.
Pull upward on the ash receiver to remove for
cleaning and/or storage.
The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to
accommodate a second ash receiver, if desired.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
The window switches on the driver’s door trim
panel control all of the door windows.
Driver’s Power Window Controls
The driver may lock out the rear power windows
by pushing the bar control just below the power
window controls.
Window Lockout Switch
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes
very hot. To avoid serious injury, handle the
cigar lighter with care. Always check that the
cigar lighter has turned off.
CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher
than 180 Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do
not damage the socket by using unsuitable
adaptors. If the 180 Watt (15 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
The window switches will operate only when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and
during power accessory delay.
NOTE:
Power Window controls will also remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition has been
placed in the OFF position, depending upon the
accessory delay setting. Opening a front door
will cancel this feature.
There is a single control on the front
passenger’s door trim panel which operates the
passenger door window and a set of controls
that lock and unlock all doors. The controls will
operate only when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
or ACC position and during power accessory
delay.
Sliding Side Door Power Window Control — If
Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close
the sliding door window by a single control on
the door handle assembly.
The controls will operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and
during power accessory delay.
NOTE:
The controls will not operate if the driver has
activated the Power Window Lockout.
Sliding Door Power Window Control
NOTE:
The sliding door windows do not fully open,
stopping several inches above the window sill.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power
window switches have an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch down for a short period
of time, then release, and the window will go
down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the
switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up for a short period of
time and release; the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then
go back down. Remove the obstacle and use
the window switch again to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the
switch lightly and hold to close the window
manually.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
REST AUTO UP
To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the
following steps after vehicle power is restored:
1. Pull the window control up to close the
window completely and continue to hold
the control up for an additional two
seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window control down firmly to the
second detent to open the window
completely and continue to hold the control
down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the rear
windows are open and buffeting occurs, open
the front and rear windows together to minimize
the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The Panoramic Sunroof switch is located to the
left between the sun visors on the overhead
console.
The Power Shade switch is located to the right
between the sun visors on the overhead
console.
Panoramic Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
fingers and all objects from the window path
before closing.
1 — Sunroof Switch
2 — Power Shade Switch
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC
or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may
result in serious injury or death.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
Express Open/Close
Push the open switch and release it within one
second. The sunroof will open automatically
from any position and stop at the full open
position. This is called Express Open.
Push the close switch and release it within one
second and the sunroof will close automatically
from any position. The sunroof will close fully
and stop automatically. This is called Express
Close.
NOTE:
During Express Open or Express Close opera-
tion, any other actuation of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
If the sunshade is in the closed position when
the open switch is pushed, the sunshade will
automatically cycle to the halfway open posi-
tion prior to the sunroof opening.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the open switch and the sunroof
will open to the full open position.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the close
switch.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the movement and the
sunroof will remain in a partially open condition
until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE POWER
S
UNSHADE — IF EQUIPPED
The sunshade has two programmed open
positions: half-open and full-open. When
opening the sunshade from the closed position,
the sunshade will always stop at the half-open
position regardless of express or manual open
operation. The switch must be actuated again
to continue to the full-open position.
Express Open/Close
Push the sunshade open switch and release it
within one second and the sunshade will open
to the half-open position and stop
automatically. Push and release the sunshade
open switch again from the half-open position
and the sunshade will open to the full-open
position and stop automatically. This is called
Express Open.
Push the sunshade close switch and release it
within one second and the sunshade will close
automatically from any position. If the sunroof is
completely closed, the shade will close fully and
stop automatically. This is called Express Close.
NOTE:
During Express Open or Express Close opera-
tion, any movement of the sunshade switch
will stop the shade.
If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to
the half-open position. Pushing the shade
close button again will automatically close
both the sunroof and shade completely.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the sunshade open switch and
the shade will open to the half-open position
and stop automatically. Push and hold the
sunshade open switch again and the shade will
open automatically to the full-open position.
To close the shade, push and hold the
sunshade close switch.
Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is
pushed again.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
closing of the sunroof during the Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if
this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
will disable and the sunroof must be closed in
Manual Mode.
VENTING SUNROOF
Push and release the "Vent" button within one
second and the sunroof will open to the vent
position. This is called “Express Vent”, and it will
occur regardless of sunroof position.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will auto-
matically cycle to the halfway open position prior
to the sunroof opening to the Vent position.
IGNITION OFF OPERATION
The power sunroof switch will remain active for
up to approximately 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
NOTE:
Ignition off time is programmable through the
Uconnect system Ú page 210.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for
and clear out any debris that may have
collected in the tracks.
HOOD
OPENING
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
The hood release lever (to open the primary
latch) and safety latch (to open the secondary
latch) must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under
the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the outside of the front of the
vehicle.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
3. Push the safety latch release lever toward
the passenger side of the vehicle. The
safety latch is located behind the center
front edge of the hood.
Safety Latch Release Lever Location
4. Remove the support rod from the locking
tab and insert it into the seat located on the
underside of the hood.
NOTE:
Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper
arms are not in motion and not in the lifted
position.
While lifting the hood, use both hands.
Vehicle must be at a stop and the transmis-
sion must be in PARK.
CLOSING
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the
other hand remove the support rod from its
seat and reinsert it into the locking tab.
2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) from the engine compartment and drop
it. Make sure that the hood is completely
closed.
LIFTGATE
TO UNLOCK/OPEN THE LIFTGATE
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
Key fob
Outside handle
Button on overhead console
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to release the liftgate.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to
close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both
latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is
fully closed, with both latches engaged.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The key fob and the overhead console button
will release the liftgate when the liftgate is
locked. The outside handle requires the liftgate
to be unlocked. If the vehicle is equipped with
Passive Entry, pulling the outside handle will
unlock and release the liftgate, with a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate.
Unlock Liftgate Using Passive Entry
NOTE:
When you push the Passive Entry button, either
only the liftgate will unlock, or all the doors and
the liftgate will unlock, depending on the
selected setting in the Uconnect system
Ú page 210.
TO LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
To manually close the liftgate, grab the liftgate
closing handle and pull in a downward motion to
close the liftgate.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry
lock button located to the right of the outside
handle to lock the vehicle.
POWER LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
The power liftgate may be opened or closed in
several ways:
Overhead console liftgate button
Key fob
Outside handle (opens liftgate only)
Button just inside the liftgate on the upper
left trim (when liftgate is open)
Hands-Free Liftgate (if equipped) — opens lift-
gate only
Using the above ways to open or close the
liftgate:
When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate
will open
When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will
close
When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will
reverse
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured
by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are
closed, and the climate control blower
switch is set at high speed. Do not use the
recirculation mode.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
Push the Power Liftgate button on the overhead
console to open or close the liftgate.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to open or close the liftgate.
Overhead Console Power Switches
The key fob and the overhead console button
will operate the liftgate when the liftgate is
locked. The outside handle requires the liftgate
to be unlocked. If the vehicle is equipped with
Passive Entry, pressing the touch pad on the
outside handle or Hands-Free Liftgate foot
activation (if equipped) will unlock and open the
liftgate, with a valid Passive Entry key fob within
5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate handle.
NOTE:
To open the liftgate, the Hands-Free Liftgate
foot activation (if equipped) requires a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the door handle.
When you push the Passive Entry button,
either only the liftgate will unlock, or all the
doors and the liftgate will unlock, depending
on the selected setting in the Uconnect
system.
Tones are sounded and the turn signals are
flashed with liftgate movements. These
alerts can be turned on or off in Uconnect
Settings Ú page 210.
To Close The Liftgate
The liftgate can also be closed using the Rear
Interior Power Liftgate button (if equipped),
located in the upper left trim in the liftgate
opening.
Rear Interior Power Liftgate Switch
To Lock The Vehicle
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Passive Entry
lock button located to the right of the outside
handle will lock the vehicle.
1 — Liftgate
2 — Right Sliding Door
3 — Sliding Door Power Off
4 — Left Sliding Door
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HANDS-FREE LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone
To open the liftgate using hands-free activation,
use a straight in and out kicking motion under the
vehicle activation zone in the general location
below the liftgate door handle. Do not move your
foot sideways or in a sweeping motion or the
sensors may not detect the motion.
Vehicles Equipped With A Trailer Tow Package
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with the Trailer Tow
Package, the hands-free activation zone(s) for
the Power Liftgate will be located on the left and
right side of the receiver. Use a straight kicking
motion under either activation zone to open the
Hands-Free Liftgate.
Hands-Free Liftgate Trailer Tow Activation Zones
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the
liftgate will chime, the hazard lights will flash
and the liftgate will open after approximately
one second. This assumes all options are
enabled in the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
To open the Hands-Free Liftgate requires a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
door handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is
not within 5 ft (1.5 m), the liftgate will not
respond to any kicks.
NOTE:
The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate
when the transmission is in PARK.
If anything obstructs the Hands-Free Liftgate
while it is opening or closing, the liftgate will
automatically reverse to the closed position,
provided it meets sufficient resistance.
There are pinch sensors attached to the side
of the liftgate opening. Light pressure
anywhere along these strips will cause the
liftgate to return to the open position.
If the power liftgate encounters multiple
obstructions within the same cycle, the
system will automatically stop. If this occurs,
the liftgate must be operated manually.
CAUTION!
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be
turned on or off in Uconnect Settings. The
Hands-Free Liftgate feature should be turned
off during jacking, tire changing, and vehicle
service Ú page 210.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
The power liftgate will release, but not power
open, in temperatures below −12°F
(−24°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of
snow or ice from the liftgate before opening
the liftgate.
If the liftgate is left open for an extended
period of time, the liftgate may need to be
closed manually to reset power liftgate func-
tionality.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open
position. However, because the gas pressure
drops with temperature, it may be necessary to
assist the props when opening the liftgate in
cold weather.
NOTE:
Allow the power system to open the liftgate.
Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may
activate the liftgate obstacle detection feature
and stop the power operation or reverse its
direction.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Area Storage
When the third row seats are not in the stowed
position, there is a large area for cargo storage.
Rear Cargo Area
NOTE:
With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 ft
(1.2 x 2.4 m) sheets of building material will fit
on the vehicle floor with the liftgate closed. The
front seats must be moved slightly forward of
the rearmost position.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured
by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are
closed, and the climate control blower
switch is set at high speed. Do not use the
recirculation mode.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or
cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate
travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is
closed and latched before driving away.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
Stow ‘n Vac Integrated Vacuum — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
integrated vacuum system. This vacuum is for
in-vehicle use only and should only be used on
dry materials and on in-vehicle surfaces. It is
located in the rear trim panel behind the sliding
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read all instructions before using. When using
your vacuum, basic precautions should be
followed, including the following:
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in either ACC mode or engine running (ON)
unless you are using the vacuum system.
Be aware a child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle when the vacuum system is in use.
ALWAYS push ignition button to place igni-
tion in the OFF mode when finished using
the vacuum system.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of fire, serious injury or
death:
Do not use vacuum while
vehicle is in motion or while
driving.
Do not vacuum wet surfaces or any liquids.
Do not use to vacuum up anything outside
of the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not vacuum any flammable
liquids, such as gasoline, or use
around explosive vapors. Vapors
from flammable liquids may form
an explosive mixture with air and can be
ignited by heat, sparks, or flames. Vapors
may travel to a source of ignition and
explode.
Do not vacuum anything that is burning or
smoking, such as cigarettes, matches, or
hot ashes/embers.
Do not allow to be used as a toy. Close
attention is necessary when used by or
near children.
Do not leave the vacuum running while
unattended.
Use only as described in this manual. Use
only attachments provided with your
vehicle.
Do not put any object into openings. Do not
use with any opening blocked; keep free of
dust, lint, hair, and anything that may
reduce air flow.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
(Continued)
The vacuum will operate in two modes:
Ignition in the ACC position: Engine remains
off, and vacuum usage is limited to
10 minutes.
Ignition in the START position: Engine is
running, and vacuum usage is unlimited until
the vehicle’s battery level falls below 60%.
NOTE:
The vacuum will not operate when the ignition is
in the OFF position, or in the ON/RUN position
with the engine off. For more information on
ignition positions, see Ú page 18.
1. Before Using Vacuum:
Accessory (ACC) Mode Operation - For up to
10 minutes of operation
Always apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and push ignition but-
ton to place ignition in Accessory (ACC) mode.
The engine will not be running in this mode. Do
not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children.
NOTE:
The vacuum system will run for 10 minutes off
battery power and then the vacuum will shut
down. A low battery indication light (LOW PWR)
located below the vacuum nozzle storage loca-
tion will come on one minute before the vacuum
shuts down.
Engine Running (START) Operation - For
more than 10 minutes of operation
Position vehicle outdoors and fully open
all side windows.
Always apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and leave
engine running.
Do not vacuum toxic material such as chlo-
rine bleach, ammonia, drain cleaner, etc.
Do not vacuum hard or sharp objects such
as glass, nails, screws, coins, etc.
Keep hair, loose clothing, fingers, and all
parts of body away from openings and
moving parts.
Only use with filter in place. Periodically
check that the filter is in place and in good
condition.
WARNING!
This equipment incorporates parts such as
switches, motors, or the like that tend to
produce arcs or sparks that can cause an
explosion. When using your vacuum near
gasoline-dispensing equipment or service
stations, park vehicle at least 20 ft (6 m)
away from the exterior enclosure of any
dispensing pump. The vacuum is mounted
more than 18 inches (45 cm) above ground
level in your vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases can
cause serious injury or death. Follow the
precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases.
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Always position
vehicle outdoors and fully open all side
windows before using vacuum system with
the engine running.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Unclip the vacuum nozzle and pull to extend
vacuum hose from the storage location.
NOTE:
The hose can reach every corner of the vehicle
floor.
3. Install desired attachment if needed.
Front Storage Compartments
NOTE:
To access crevice or upholstery attachments,
open the front Attachment Compartment.
Crevice Tool — Able to reach into tight
spaces including the seat latches located
in the floor.
Upholstery Tool — Use to agitate dirt and
debris from carpets and seats. This tool
can also be used to pick up pet hair.
Hose Extension — Use to add another
12 ft (3.6 m) of usable length to the
vacuum hose. Hose extension is provided
in a bag attached to a grocery hook
behind the third row seat on the driver’s
side.
4. Push the vacuum on/off button located
under the vacuum nozzle storage location.
Use vacuum as needed.
NOTE:
When the vacuum is ON, the LED indi-
cator on the on/off button will illuminate.
When the vacuum is OFF, the LED indi-
cator will also be off.
After nine minutes of operation in ACC
mode (engine not running), the Low
Power Indicator Light (LOW PWR) will illu-
minate.
Power Buttons
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have
any abnormal conditions repaired promptly.
1 — Vacuum Nozzle Storage Location
2 — Attachment Compartment
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Low Power Indicator Light
2 — On/Off Button
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
(Continued)
5. When finished, push power button to turn
vacuum off and store vacuum hose and any
attachments.
6. Before exiting the vehicle:
If the ignition is in the ACC position, push
the START/STOP ignition button to place
ignition in the OFF position, remove key
fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
If the engine is running, raise all of the
windows, push the START/STOP ignition
button to place ignition in the OFF posi-
tion, remove key fob from the vehicle,
close all of the doors and the liftgate and
lock the vehicle.
WARNING!
For in vehicle use ONLY. To reduce the risk of
fire, serious injury or death:
Do not use vacuum while vehicle is in
motion or while driving.
Do not vacuum wet surfaces or any liquids.
Do not use to vacuum up anything outside
of the vehicle.
Do not vacuum any flammable liquids, such
as gasoline, or use around explosive vapors.
Vapors from flammable liquids may form an
explosive mixture with air and can be ignited
by heat, sparks, or flames. Vapors may travel
to a source of ignition and explode.
Do not vacuum anything that is burning or
smoking, such as cigarettes, matches, or
hot ashes/embers.
Do not allow to be used as a toy. Close
attention is necessary when used by or
near children.
Do not leave the vacuum running while
unattended.
Use only as described in this manual. Use
only attachments provided with your
vehicle.
Do not put any object into openings. Do not
use with any opening blocked; keep free of
dust, lint, hair, and anything that may
reduce air flow.
Do not vacuum toxic material such as chlo-
rine bleach, ammonia, drain cleaner, etc.
Do not vacuum hard or sharp objects such
as glass, nails, screws, coins, etc.
Keep hair, loose clothing, fingers, and all
parts of body away from openings and
moving parts.
Only use with filter in place. Periodically
check that the filter is in place and in good
condition.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
This equipment incorporates parts such as
switches, motors, or the like that tend to produce
arcs or sparks that can cause an explosion. When
using your vacuum near gasoline-dispensing
equipment or service stations, park vehicle at
least 20 ft (6 m) away from the exterior enclosure
of any dispensing pump. The vacuum is mounted
more than 18 inches (45 cm) above ground level
in your vehicle.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Vacuum Troubleshooting
DO NOT use with any opening blocked. If an
object becomes lodged in the hose, attempt
to fully extend the hose in a straight line while
the vacuum motor is running. If this does not
dislodge the object, turn the vacuum OFF and
remove the hose from the vehicle following
the removal instructions below. If the filter is
clogged, follow the emptying debris bin
procedure and lightly tap the filter on the
collection bin to remove any collected debris
from the filter. Both the bin and the filter can
be rinsed with water if needed. To avoid mold
and stale odors, allow both to dry completely
before reinstalling in your vehicle. If the filter
has tears, holes or other damage and needs
to be replaced, please contact an authorized
dealer.
If there are any other issues with your
vacuum, contact an authorized dealer. Your
vacuum has no user serviceable parts.
Debris Bin
The debris bin is located behind the access
panel behind the third row seat on the driver’s
side.
To Empty
1. Push power button to turn vacuum OFF.
2. Open the access panel by pulling the finger
grip towards you and then pull downward.
Vacuum System Access Panel
3. Twist the release knob counterclockwise
and pull the bin towards you.
Debris Bin Release Knob
4. Remove the filter and dump the debris in a
trash can. Lightly tap the filter on the
collection bin to remove loose debris from
the filter. If the filter is clogged from
extended use, have the filter replaced by an
authorized dealer.
5. Reverse the procedure to reinstall.
NOTE:
The debris bin must be fully installed and locked
for the vacuum to function properly.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
Hose Access Port
The hose access port is located behind the
access panel behind the third row seat on the
driver’s side.
To Remove Vacuum Hose For Cleaning
1. Open the access panel.
Vacuum System Access Panel
2. Open the small access panel on the upper
right side, and unclip the hose from the
hose access port by pushing the yellow
vacuum hose release lever with right thumb
and lifting the hose with index finger.
Vacuum Hose Release Lever
3. Return to vacuum nozzle storage location
located behind the sliding door.
4. Grab the vacuum nozzle and gently pull the
hose out through vacuum nozzle storage
location.
5. Shake the hose to remove any objects stuck
in the hose. Take care not to perforate the
hose while attempting to dislodge any
objects.
6. Reverse the procedure to reinstall and clip
the hose into place.
STOW ‘N PLACE ROOF RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to
carry weight on vehicles equipped with a
luggage rack. The load must not exceed 150 lb
(68 kg), and should be uniformly distributed
over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered
stowed within the roof rack side rails. Crossbars
should always be used whenever cargo is
placed on the roof rack. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
Roof Rack
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Stow ‘N Place roof rack does not increase
the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle.
Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle
plus that on the external rack does not exceed
the maximum vehicle load capacity.
DEPLOYING THE CROSSBARS
1. To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen
the thumb screws at both ends of the
crossbar and lift the crossbar from its
stowed position in the side rail. Repeat
with crossbar on the opposite side.
Thumb Screw
NOTE:
The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
Removing Crossbars
2. Bend the crossbar supports at each end,
taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting
joint. Slide the thumb screw down.
Bending Pivot
3. Position the crossbars across the roof making
sure the letters on the crossbars align with the
matching letters on the side rail.
Positioning Crossbars
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the
crossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
4. Once the crossbar is in place, tighten both
thumb screws completely.
Installing Crossbars
5. Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to
complete the deployment of the crossbars.
NOTE:
The crossbars are not identical and have fixed
deployment positions. Rear crossbar can be
deployed in two different positions.
STOWING THE CROSSBARS
1. Starting with one crossbar, completely
loosen the thumb screws at both ends. Lift
the crossbar away from the matching letter
to remove it from the deployed position.
Repeat with the other crossbar.
2. Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the
pivot supports at each end.
Crossbar Pivot
3. Then, position the crossbar along the
correct side rail. Make sure the letters on
the crossbar align with the matching letters
on the side rail.
Stowing Crossbars
4. The crossbar will nest fully within the side
rail.
Crossbar To Side Rail
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the
crossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle.
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place,
tighten the thumb screws completely.
Tightening Crossbar
6. Repeat the procedure to stow the second
crossbar on the opposite side.
Stowed Crossbars
NOTE:
To help control wind noise, stow the cross-
bars in the side rails when they are not in use.
If any metallic object is placed over the satel-
lite radio antenna (if equipped), you may
experience interruption of satellite radio
reception.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before
driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads
can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high
speeds, resulting in personal injury or
property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the roof of your
vehicle, DO NOT carry any loads on the roof
rack without the crossbars deployed. The
load should be secured and placed on top
of the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If
it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or other protective layer
between the load and the roof surface.
To avoid damage to the roof rack and
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof
rack load capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always
distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible
and secure the load appropriately.
Load should always be secured to cross
bars first, with tie down loops used as addi-
tional securing points if needed. Tie loops
are intended as supplementary tie down
points only. Do not use ratcheting mecha-
nisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
and thumb wheels frequently to be sure
that the load remains securely attached.
CAUTION! (Continued)
Long loads that extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or
loads with large frontal area should be
secured to both the front and rear of the
vehicle.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to
natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can
add sudden upward lift to a load. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119
Premium Instrument Cluster
3
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 121.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
The display shows one of the main menu
items after the ignition is turned/placed on.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge can indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather or up
mountain grades. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range.
5. Fuel Gauge
The gauge shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel door is located.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
when the ignition is first cycled.
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reaches “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off
until the gauge drops back into the normal
range and is no longer red. If the gauge remains
on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately and
call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats Ú page 366.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information
to the driver. With the ignition in the OFF
position (and the key removed, for vehicles with
mechanical key), opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles or kilometers in the odometer. Your
instrument cluster display is designed to display
important information about your vehicle’s
systems and features. Using a driver interactive
display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings
when they are not. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through and enter
the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and
make selections and adjustments.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
L
OCATION AND CONTROLS
The vehicle’s instrument cluster is equipped
with an instrument cluster display (base or
premium cluster), which offers useful
information to the driver.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
The instrument cluster display controls allows
the driver to select information by pushing the
directional buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
3
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to
scroll upward through the Main Menu items.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button
to scroll downward through the Main Menu
items.
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
Back / Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of a
Main Menu item. Push and hold the OK
button for two seconds to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
The instrument cluster display (base/premium
cluster) features a driver interactive display that
is located in the center of the instrument
cluster, and may include the following menu/
submenu items:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Fuel Economy
Trip (Trip A / Trip B)
Stop / Start — If Equipped
Audio
Messages
Screen Setup
OIL LIFE RESET
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display for approxi-
mately five seconds after a single chime has
sounded, to indicate it is time to change the
engine oil. The engine oil change indicator
system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time the ignition is cycled to the
ON/RUN position.
To reset the oil change indicator after
performing the scheduled maintenance,
refer to the following procedure.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
NOTE:
This procedure should only be performed after
scheduled maintenance is completed. Reset-
ting oil life other than when associated with a
scheduled maintenance may result in damage
due to not properly maintaining the engine oil.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not
start the vehicle.)
2. Push the OK button to enter the instrument
cluster display menu screen.
3. Push and release the down arrow button
to access the ”Vehicle Info” menu screen.
4. Push the left arrow button or right
arrow button to access the “Oil Life”
submenu.
5. Hold the OK button to reset the “Oil Life” to
100%.
6. Push the up arrow button to exit the
instrument cluster display menu screen.
Secondary Method For Oil Life Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
3
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
KEYSENSE CLUSTER MESSAGES — IF EQUIPPED
When the KeySense key is in use there will be:
Continuous, dedicated telltale
Unique Display Splash Screen
With KeySense in use there will be multiple associated messages shown in the following table:
Setting Instrument Cluster Display Message
None – With vehicle ignition ON “KeySense in use. Max vehicle speed set to xx MPH/or km/h”
Max Vehicle Speed
“Max speed reached. KeySense in use” supported by a chime
“Approaching max speed xx MPH/km/h” supported by a chime
Start Up Fuel Alert message “Range to empty xxx miles or km”
Early Low Fuel Alert Message “Fuel Low”
ParkSense “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
Blind Spot “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
Forward Collision Warning “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU
I
TEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to
view the main menu items for several features.
Use the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through the driver interactive display
menu options until the desired menu is reached
Ú page 121.
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items
display in the center of the instrument cluster.
Menu items may vary depending on your vehicle
features.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until Speedometer is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK button to toggle between MPH and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until Vehicle Info is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push the left or
right arrow button to scroll through the
following information submenus:
Tire Pressure
If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON
is displayed with tire pressure values in each
corner of the ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate
Tire To XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON,
and the tire pressure values in each corner of
the ICON with the pressure value of the low tire
displayed in a different color than the other tire
pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service,
“Service Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and
cannot be reset Ú page 270.
Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
Transmission Temp
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Oil Temp
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Oil Life
Displays the remaining engine oil life as a
percentage.
To reset the Oil Life, you must hold the OK
button. The “Hold OK to Reset” instruction will
be displayed at all times, but the following
conditions will need to be met in order to reset
Oil Life:
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
If the conditions are met, holding the OK button
will reset the gauge and the numeric display will
return to 100%.
If the conditions are not met, a pop-up message
will display for five seconds, describing the
required conditions, and then the Oil Life screen
will reappear.
Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage.
Engine Hours — If Equipped
Displays the number of hours of engine
operation.
3
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Driver Assist
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Driver Assist display icon is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display
Ú page 165.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Fuel Economy Menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
The Fuel Economy Menu will display the
following:
Two submenu pages that can be toggled
between using the left and right arrow
buttons; one with Current Value displayed
and one without the Current Value displayed:
Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km,
or km/L)
Range To Empty (miles or km)
Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km,
or km/L)
The Max and Min values will correspond
to the particular engine requirements
Hold OK to reset average fuel economy infor-
mation.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip Menu item is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push the left
or right arrow button to scroll through the
Trip A and Trip B submenus. The Trip
information will display the following:
Distance
Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Stop / Start – If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Stop/Start menu title is
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Audio Menu displays in the
instrument cluster display.
Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until Messages is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. This feature shows
the number of stored warning messages.
Pushing the right arrow button will allow you
to see what the stored messages are.
NOTE:
The pop-up messages indicate the status of the
system and/or the conditions that need to be
met. Messages remain in the stored stack until
condition is cleared.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Screen Setup Menu displays in
the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the OK button to enter the submenus.
The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
what information is displayed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location that information
is displayed.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
Premium Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:
1 — Lower Left
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range
Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
3
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2 —Upper Center
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range
Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Audio/Phone
Digital Speed
Menu Title
Premium Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
3 — Lower Right
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range
Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
4 — Odometer (Premium Instrument Cluster)
Show
Hide (Odometer will still appear when door is open)
5 — Defaults
Restore
Cancel
Premium Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:
3
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Base Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:
1 — Upper Left
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range
Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
2 — Upper Right
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range
Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
3 — Center
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range
Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Audio Menu Title
Menu Title
Digital Speed
4 — Defaults
Restore
Cancel
Base Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:
3
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Speed Warning — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until Speed Warning is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release
the OK button to enter Speed Warning. Use the
up or down arrow button to turn the
Speed Warning ON or OFF, then push and
release the OK button to confirm the selection.
If the ON status is selected, use the up or
down arrow button to set the desired speed,
then push the OK button to set the speed for the
Speed Warning. A Speed Warning telltale will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, with a
number matching the set speed, with a pop-up
message to inform the driver that the Speed
Warning has been set to the desired speed.
Each time the set speed is exceeded, a single
chime will sound and a pop-up warning
message will display. If the set speed is
exceeded more than 2 mph (3 km/h), a
continuous chime will sound for up to 10
seconds, or until the speed is no longer
exceeded. The telltale in the instrument cluster
will also change from white to yellow, and a
pop-up warning message will pop-up on the
instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
Speed Warning is unavailable while KeySense
is in use.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional
monitoring of the electrical system and status
of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the 12 Volt vehicle battery conditions
are deteriorating, electrical load reduction
actions will take place to extend the driving time
and distance of the vehicle. This is done by
reducing power to or turning off non-essential
12 Volt electrical loads. Load reduction will be
functional when the vehicle propulsion system
is active.
The vehicle may not be running depending on
the High Voltage (HV) battery State Of Charge
(SOC) or temperature. It will display a message
if there is a risk of battery depletion to the point
where the vehicle may stall due to lack of
electrical supply, or will not restart after the
current drive cycle.
When 12 Volt load reduction is activated, the
message “Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode” will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery
has a low state of charge and continues to lose
electrical charge at a rate that the charging
system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from
load reduction. The charging system
performs a diagnostic on the charging
system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it
may indicate a problem with the charging
system Ú page 135.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
effected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system
because the electrical loads are larger than
the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical
loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and
interior lights, overloaded power outlets
+12 Volts, 150W, USB ports) during certain
driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights,
upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated
by long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended
period of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was
not charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical
load left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appli-
ances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles
and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On”
or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if
possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or
exterior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and
review specifications if any (load and Ignition
Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecu-
tive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle
and driving pattern did not help to identify the
cause.
TRIP COMPUTER
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the up or
down arrow button until “Trip Info” is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Navigate between Trip A or Trip B by using the
right and left arrow buttons.
3
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
For each trip the following information will be
displayed:
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A
since the last reset.
Shows the Average MPG for Trip A since the
last reset.
Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A
since the last reset. Elapsed time will incre-
ment when the ignition switch is in the ON or
START position.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B
since the last reset.
Shows the Average MPG for Trip B since the
last reset.
Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B
since the last reset. Elapsed time will incre-
ment when the ignition switch is in the ON or
START position.
To Reset A Trip Function
Push and hold the OK button to reset the
currently displayed trip.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to
the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully
in all cases. Always refer to the information in
this chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different
based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and
will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light is either not on during startup, stays
on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a
problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If
it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
a door is ajar/open and not fully
closed. This indicator will reflect
which doors are open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning
Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the Electric Power
Steering (EPS) system Ú page 160.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
3
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the ETC
system. If a problem is detected while
the vehicle is running, the light will
either stay on or flash depending on the nature
of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the
vehicle is safely and completely stopped and
the transmission is placed in the PARK (P)
position. The light should turn off. If the light
remains on with the vehicle running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and
a single chime will sound. If the temperature
reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will
sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool; whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning
(A/C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the
vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
return to normal, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service Ú page 343.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the hood is left open and not fully
closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When
driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will flash or remain on continuously and a chime
will sound
Ú
page 274.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
warn of a high transmission fluid
temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you
may continue to drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will flash at a fast
rate for approximately 15 seconds
when the vehicle security system is
arming, and then will flash slowly until
the vehicle is disarmed.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the ACC system.
Contact a local authorized dealer for
service Ú page 165.
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS.
The light will turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and may stay on for as
long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required
as soon as possible. However, the conventional
brake system will continue to operate normally,
assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
3
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, have the brake system inspected
by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when
the ESC system is Active. The ESC
Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, and when ESC is activated. It should
go out with the engine running. If the ESC
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this warning light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and
corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is
off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/
RUN or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be
on, even if it was turned off previously.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 1.85 gal (7 L) this
warning light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel
Warning.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the windshield washer fluid is low.
Service LaneSense Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the LaneSense system is not
operating and requires service.
Please see an authorized dealer.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be
solid yellow when the vehicle is
approaching a lane marker. The
warning light will flash when the
vehicle is crossing the lane marker
Ú page 187.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light
The Engine Check/Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an
Onboard Diagnostic System called
OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Service AWD Warning Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate
that the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system
is not functioning properly and that
service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Service Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the AEB Warning
System. Contact an authorized dealer
for service Ú page 267.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start system is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized
dealer for service Ú page 161.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This
could result in death or serious injury to the
driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
to the vehicle control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
3
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires is significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair
kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire
sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to
indicate that Forward Collision
Warning is off.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Vehicle Detected Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Adaptive Cruise Control
speed is SET and the vehicle in front is
detected Ú page 165.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Adaptive Cruise Control
speed is SET and there is no vehicle in
front detected Ú page 165.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is set to the
desired speed Ú page 164.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on.
KeySense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The KeySense indicator is illuminated
when a KeySense key is detected
upon startup of the vehicle. The
indicator will remain lit for the entire
key cycle as a reminder that the KeySense key
is in use. While the KeySense key is in use, the
vehicle will respond to settings associated with
the KeySense profile Ú page 14.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid green when both lane
markings have been detected and the
system is “armed” and ready to provide
visual and torque warnings if an unintentional lane
departure occurs
Ú
page 187.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Stop/Start function is in
“Autostop” mode Ú page 161.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal
lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated
when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
3
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light
— If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the vehicle equipped with ACC
has been turned on but not set
Ú page 165.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is ready, but
not set Ú page 164.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON,
but not armed, the LaneSense
indicator light illuminates solid white.
This occurs when only left, right, or
neither lane line has been detected. If a single
lane line is detected, the system is ready to
provide only visual warnings if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line
Ú page 187.
Set Speed Display
The Set Speed Display indicator light
indicates the set speed for the Cruise
Control and Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) settings.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam
headlights are on. With the low beams
activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and automatic transmission
control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide
excellent performance and fuel economy, as
well as emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD
II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes
and other information to assist your service
technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may
need to access this information to assist with
the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system Ú page 209.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
3
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will
remain fully illuminated until you place
the ignition in the off position or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should
have your vehicle serviced before going to the
I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
145
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belts.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the
NEUTRAL (N) or PARK (P) position. Apply the
brake before shifting to any driving range.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle
fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push the
button again.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three
positions; OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the
ignition positions without starting the vehicle
and to use the accessories follow these steps:
Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once
to place the ignition to the ACC position
(instrument cluster will display “ACC”).
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second
time to place the ignition to the RUN position
(instrument cluster will display “ON/RUN”).
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
time to return the ignition to the OFF position
(instrument cluster will display “OFF”).
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the
vehicle. Torque performance of the vehicle
could be reduced if both pedals are pressed at
the same time. If pressure is detected on both
pedals simultaneously, a warning message will
display in the instrument cluster Ú page 121.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK if the situations
below occur. It is a back up system and should
not be relied upon as the primary method by
which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will
engage are outlined on the following pages.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle
is in PARK by looking for the “P” in the
instrument cluster display and on the gear
selector. As an added precaution, always apply
the parking brake.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver
attempts to turn off the engine, if certain
conditions are met, the vehicle will AutoPark,
automatically shifting the vehicle’s
transmission to the PARK position. The gear
selector will automatically reset itself to the
PARK position. The vehicle’s ignition will then
move to the OFF position (engine off). When
AutoPark is activated the instrument cluster will
display the message “AutoPark Engaged”.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver has pushed the ENGINE START/STOP
button
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to
place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A
VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK
by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is
indicated in the instrument cluster display
and near the gear selector. If the “P” indi-
cator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK.
As an added precaution, always apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system
and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
(Continued)
(Continued)
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the vehicle with the engine running, if certain
conditions are met, the vehicle will AutoPark,
automatically shifting the vehicle’s
transmission to the PARK position. The Electric
Park Brake SAFE HOLD feature will also activate
in some conditions Ú page 153.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s door is ajar
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged” will display in
the instrument cluster.
AutoPark In Stop/Start Autostop Mode
AutoPark will engage when all of these condi-
tions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s door is ajar
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled or brake pedal
is not pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged” will display in
the instrument cluster.
CAUTION!
Engine will remain running.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to
a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
To release the parking brake manually, the
ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position.
Press on the brake pedal, then push the parking
brake switch momentarily.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may Park.
PARK will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to
Shift to P” will display in the instrument cluster
display if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h). The gear position indicator will blink
continuously until the gear selector is returned
to the proper position, or the requested shift
can be completed.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the trans-
mission into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF.
When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(B
ELOW –22°F O R −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these
temperatures, use of an externally powered
electric engine block heater (available from an
authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING — WARMING UP THE
E
NGINE
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it
will decrease as the engine warms up.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START T O TURN OFF THE ENGINE USING
ENGINE START/STOP B
UTTON
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP
button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF
position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held
for two seconds or three short pushes in a
row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The
ignition switch position will remain in the
ACC position until the gear selector is in
PARK and the button is pushed twice to the
OFF position. If the gear selector is not in
PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP button
is pushed once, the instrument cluster will
display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and
the engine will remain running. Never leave
a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it
could roll.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is not below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h) when the driver shifts into PARK,
the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until
the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h) and the above conditions are met,
enabling AutoPark. A vehicle left in the
NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 339.
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmis-
sion is in PARK, the system will automatically
time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the
ignition will switch to the OFF position.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and
permits quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension
cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C),
the engine block heater is recommended. For
ambient temperatures below -20°F (-29°C),
the engine block heater is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under
the hood, behind to the passenger’s side
headlamp. Follow the steps below to properly
use the engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord
(behind the passenger’s side headlamp).
2. Undo the hook-and-loop strap that secures
the heater cord in place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and
plug it into a grounded, three-wire extension
cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the
cord to the hook-and-loop strap and
properly stow away behind the passenger’s
side headlamp.
NOTE:
The engine block heater cord is a factory
installed option. If your vehicle is not
equipped, heater cords are available from an
authorized dealer.
The engine block heater will require
110 Volts AC and 6.5 Amps to activate the
heater element.
The engine block heater must be plugged in
at least one hour to have an adequate
warming effect on the engine.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate conditions under which
vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades
Ú page 356.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
PARKING BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers
simple operation, and some additional features
that make the parking brake more convenient
and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to
prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is applied. Also, be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways;
Manually, by applying the parking brake
switch.
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park
Brake feature in the customer programmable
features Ú page 211.
The EPB is located in the integrated center
stack.
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the parking brake manually, push the
switch momentarily. You may hear a sound from
the back of the vehicle while the parking brake
engages. Once the parking brake is fully
engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and an indicator on the
switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake
pedal while you apply the parking brake, you
may notice a small amount of brake pedal
movement. The parking brake can be applied
even when the ignition switch is OFF, however,
it can only be released when the ignition switch
in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 180 seconds. The
light will extinguish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the
parking brake will automatically engage
whenever the transmission is placed into PARK.
Once the parking brake is engaged, the BRAKE
warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the
LED indicator on the switch will illuminate. If
your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice
a small amount of brake pedal movement while
the parking brake is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically
when the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position, the transmission is in DRIVE or
REVERSE, and the driver seat belt is buckled
and an attempt is made to drive the vehicle
away by pressing the accelerator pedal.
To release the parking brake manually, the
ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position.
Press on the brake pedal, then push the parking
brake switch momentarily. You may hear a
sound from the back of the vehicle while the
parking brake disengages. You may also notice
a small amount of movement in the brake
pedal. Once the parking brake is fully
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
disengaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the
switch will extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. Apply the parking brake before placing
the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make
it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
If exceptional circumstances should make it
necessary to engage the parking brake while
the vehicle is in motion, push on the EPB switch
for as long as engagement is desired. The
BRAKE warning lamp will illuminate, and a
continuous chime will sound. The rear stop
lamps will also be illuminated automatically
while the vehicle remains in motion.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and
cause damage or injury. Also be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to
do so may allow the vehicle to roll and
cause damage or injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
engaged, or repeated use of the parking
brake to slow the vehicle may cause
serious damage to the brake system.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake
system malfunction is indicated. Have the
brake system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
To disengage the parking brake while the
vehicle is in motion, release the switch. If the
vehicle is brought to a complete stop using the
parking brake, when the vehicle reaches
approximately 3 mph (4.8 km/h), the parking
brake will remain engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate.
This may be accompanied by the BRAKE
warning lamp flashing. In this case, urgent
service of the EPB system is required. Do not
rely on the parking brake to hold the vehicle
stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The Electric Park Brake (EPB) can be
programmed to be applied automatically
whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and the
automatic transmission is placed in PARK. Auto
Park Brake is enabled and disabled by
customer selection through the customer
programmable features Ú page 211.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park
Brake (EPB) system that will engage the parking
brake automatically if the vehicle is left
unsecured. If the automatic transmission is not
in PARK, the seat belt is unbuckled, the driver
door is open, the vehicle is at a standstill, and
there is no attempt to press the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal, the parking brake will
automatically engage to prevent the vehicle
from rolling.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by
pushing the EPB while the driver door is open
and brake pedal is pressed. Once manually
bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled again once
the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position and back to
ON again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by
an authorized dealer. You should only make
repairs for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. You should only enter
Brake Service Mode during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be
necessary for you or your technician to push the
rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the
Electric Park Brake (EPB) system, this can only
be done after retracting the EPB actuator.
Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done
easily by entering the brake service in your
vehicle Ú page 211. This menu based system
will guide you through the steps necessary to
retract the EPB actuator in order to perform rear
brake service.
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
Brake Service Mode has requirements that
must be met in order to be activated:
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
The parking brake must be unapplied.
The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
While in service mode, the EPB fault lamp will
flash continuously while the ignition switch is
ON.
When brake service work is complete, the
following steps must be followed to reset the
parking brake system to normal operation:
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
Apply the EPB.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only that service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the
OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also
locks the transmission in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when
the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission
is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC
mode) before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds
the transmission gear selector in PARK unless
the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
NINE-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission is controlled using a rotary
electronic gear selector located on the center
console. The transmission gear selector has
PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW
shift positions. Using the LOW position manually
downshifts the transmission to a lower gear
based on vehicle speed. The transmission gear
range (PRNDL) is displayed both above the gear
selector and in the instrument cluster. To select
a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector.
Push down on the gear selector and then rotate
it, to access the L position. You must also press
the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
PARK (or NEUTRAL, when stopped or moving at
low speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges
at once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate
the gear selector to the appropriate detent.
Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects PARK while
driving), the position indicator will blink continu-
ously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver
inputs, along with environmental and road
conditions. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts
on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt.
This is a normal condition, and precision shifts
will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
The nine-speed transmission has been
developed to meet the needs of current and
future FWD/AWD vehicles. Software and
calibration is refined to optimize the customer’s
driving experience and fuel economy. By design,
some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize
NINTH gear only in very specific driving
situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
Transmission Gear Selector
GEAR RANGES
Do not press the accelerator pedal when
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward
the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition off.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P), and is not blinking.
With brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The
engine may be started in this range. Apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into
PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must start the
engine, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a
collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 206.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 346.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating
conditions.
If the transmission temperature exceeds
normal operating limits, the transmission
controller may modify the transmission shift
schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or expand
the range of torque converter clutch
engagement. This is done to prevent
transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the
“Transmission Temperature Warning Light” will
illuminate, a warning message will appear in the
instrument cluster, and the transmission may
operate differently until the transmission cools
down.
During cold temperatures, transmission
operation may be modified depending on
engine and transmission temperature as well
as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of
the torque converter clutch, and shifts into
EIGHTH or NINTH gear, are inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm Ú page 160. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
LOW (L)
Use this range for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, the
transmission will downshift for increased
engine braking. To access the LOW position,
push down on the gear selector and rotate it
fully clockwise.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored
electronically for abnormal conditions. If a
condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, Transmission Limp
Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in a fixed gear,
or may remain in NEUTRAL. The Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp
Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven
to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if
possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
assess the condition of your transmission. If the
transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy
has been included in the automatic
transmission on your vehicle. A clutch within the
torque converter engages automatically at
calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal
operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle
speed drops or during some accelerations, the
clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the engine and/or transmission is warm
(usually after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving).
Because the engine speed is higher when the
torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
seem as if the transmission is not shifting prop-
erly when the vehicle is cold. This is normal. The
torque converter clutch will function normally
once the powertrain is sufficiently warm.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel
Drive (AWD). The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills
required. Under normal driving conditions, the
front wheels provide most of the traction. If the
front wheels begin to lose traction, power is
shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The
greater the front wheel traction loss, the greater
the power transfer to the rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy
throttle input (where one may have no wheel
spin), torque will be sent to the rear in a
pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle launch
and performance characteristics.
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise
Cancellation System. This system is designed to
address exhaust and engine noise. The system
relies on four microphones embedded in the
headliner, which monitor exhaust and engine
noise, and assists an onboard frequency
generator, which creates counteracting sound
waves in the audio system’s speakers. This
helps keep the vehicle quiet at idle and during
drive.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability. The power steering system
adapts to different driving conditions.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type
tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be used.
Unequal tire size may cause failure of the
power transfer unit.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
If the Steering icon is displayed and the
“POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP”
message is displayed on the instrument cluster
screen, this indicates an over temperature
condition in the power steering system. Once
driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the
vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon
and message turn off Ú page 134.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING"
OR "POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF -
SERVICE SYSTEM” message and a
steering wheel icon are displayed on
the instrument cluster screen, it indicates that
the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power
steering assistance Ú page 134.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer
the vehicle. Under these conditions there will
be a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at low speeds and during parking
maneuvers.
The power steering system is fully electric; it
requires no power steering fluid.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce
fuel consumption. The system will stop the
engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the
required conditions are met. Releasing the
brake pedal, pressing the accelerator pedal or
shifting out of DRIVE (D) will automatically
re-start the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy
duty starter, enhanced battery, and other
upgraded engine parts to handle the additional
engine starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
driver key start. At that time, the system will go
into STOP/START READY and if all other
conditions are met, can go into a STOP/START
AUTOSTOP ACTIVE.
To Activate Auto STOP/START, The Following
Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster within the
Stop/Start section Ú page 134.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in a forward gear
and the brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
move to the zero position and the Stop/Start
telltale will illuminate indicating you are in
Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained
throughout the Auto Stop/Start process.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions for Stop/
Start and ensure they are fulfilled. Detailed
information about the operation of the Stop/
Start system may be viewed in the instrument
cluster display Stop/Start screen. Situations
when the engine will not stop include (but not
limited to):
If Stop/Start is manually disabled by the
Stop/Start OFF button.
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low. During this time a
message will display “Stop/Start Not Ready
Battery Charging”.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
blower speed.
HVAC set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient
pressure.
Accelerator pedal input.
Engine temp too high.
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from
previous Autostop.
Steering angle beyond threshold.
Vehicle at too high of an altitude.
Ambient temperature is beyond operating
range.
Stop/Start related system malfunction.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the Stop/Start system
going into a STOP/START READY state under
more extreme conditions of the items listed
above.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP
While in a forward gear, the engine will start
when the brake pedal is released or the throttle
pedal is pressed. The transmission will
automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop:
The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE.
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
Battery voltage drops too low. During this
time a message will display "Stop/Start Not
Ready Battery Charging".
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
Stop/Start related system malfunction.
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Button
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will
illuminate. The “STOP/START OFF” message
will appear in the instrument cluster display and
the autostop mode will be disabled
Ú page 134.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to
the ON mode every time the ignition is turned
OFF and back ON.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
After turning off the Stop/Start system, push
the Stop/Start OFF switch again (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn
off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start
system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display and the Stop/Start telltale will remain
yellow Ú page 121.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message appears in the instrument cluster
display, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
If a malfunction occurs during an autostop, the
vehicle may not auto start and will need a key
start.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system:
Cruise Control for cruising at a constant
preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) for maintaining
a set distance between you and the vehicle
ahead using Fixed Speed Cruise Control to
automatically adjust the preset speed.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if an ACC
distance is not set, Fixed Speed Cruise Control
will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you.
Always be aware of the mode selected.
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
CRUISE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25 mph (40 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Cruise
Control system has been designed to shut down
if multiple Cruise Control functions are operated
at the same time. If this occurs, the Cruise
Control system can be reactivated by pushing
the Cruise Control on/off button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. The cruise indicator light in the
instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn
the system off, push the on/off button a second
time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pushing the
SET (+) or SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
1 — On/Off
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (+)/Accel
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always turn the system
off when you are not using it.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Cruise Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. On steep hills, a
greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may
be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, or pushing the CANC
button, or normal brake pressure will deactivate
the Cruise Control system without erasing the
set speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition
in the OFF position erases the set speed from
memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — I F
E
QUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the
driving convenience provided by cruise control
while traveling on highways and major
roadways. However, it is not a safety system
and not designed to prevent collisions. The
Cruise Control function performs differently
Ú page 164.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control
engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions
without the constant need to reset your Cruise
Control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or accelerate
(not to exceed the original set speed) auto-
matically to maintain a preset following
distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the perfor-
mance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and
Forward Collision Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control alone (an ACC
distance not set) will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the
mode selected.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for active
driver involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic,
and weather conditions, vehicle speed,
distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
tions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe
control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death
or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians,
oncoming vehicles, and stationary
objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance
conditions.
Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a target vehicle and hold
the vehicle for approximately three
minutes in the stop position. If the
target vehicle does not start moving
within three minutes the parking brake
will be activated, and the ACC system
will be cancelled.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situa-
tions (i.e., in highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering
wheel operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster displays the current ACC
system settings.The information it displays
depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button until one of the following displays in the
instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located
on the steering wheel) and the following will
display in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is
pushed, the display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in
the instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no
ACC display activity
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY
state, the instrument cluster displays “ACC
Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
display “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
1 — CANC/Cancel
2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
3 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
4 — Distance Decrease
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — RES/Resume
7 — SET (-)/Decel
8 — Distance Increase
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
When the vehicle speed is below the
minimum speed range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at
low speeds
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster will read “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the instrument cluster display will show
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button
and release. The instrument cluster display will
show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without
an ACC distance set. To change between the
different modes, push the ACC on/off button
which turns the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning on
(changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to
20 mph (20 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall
be the current speed of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it
to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have a collision. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In the Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the
system will not react to vehicles ahead. In
addition, the proximity warning does not
activate and no alarm will sound even if you
are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be
sure to maintain a safe distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be
aware which mode is selected.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal
can cause the vehicle to continue to accel-
erate beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed while an ACC distance is also set, the
system will not be controlling the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
The vehicle speed will only be determined by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
Speed Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated).
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed
in memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and then remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal. The instrument
cluster display will display the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed
Cruise Control is being used.
NOTE:
If your vehicle stays at a standstill for
longer than two seconds, then the driver
will either have to push the RES (resume)
button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) to
the existing set speed.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a
stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in
close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
a set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
ments until the button is released. The new
set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
new set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button
or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed will be the
current speed of the vehicle.
When An ACC Distance Is Also Set:
When you use the SET (-) button to decel-
erate, if the engine’s braking power does not
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set
speed, the brake system will automatically
slow the vehicle.
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a
full stop when following the vehicle in front. If
your vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a
standstill, after two seconds the driver will
either have to push the RES (resume) button,
or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage
the ACC to the existing set speed.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while
climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving uphill and down-
hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking
temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be
set by varying the distance setting between four
bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars
(medium) and one bar (short). Using this
distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle
ahead. This distance setting displays in the
instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Increase button and release. Each
time the button is pushed, the distance setting
increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Decrease button and release. Each
time the button is pushed, the distance setting
decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle
is detected in the same lane, the instrument
cluster displays the ACC Set With Target Detected
Indicator Light, and the system adjusts vehicle
speed automatically to maintain the distance
setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
above the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages Ú page 168.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the
Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
engaged and following a vehicle, the system will
provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC
set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the
driver utilizes the left turn signal and will only be
active when passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your
vehicle to a standstill while following the vehicle
in front, your vehicle will resume motion,
without the need for any driver action, if the
vehicle in front starts moving within two
seconds.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving
within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, the driver will either have to push the
RES button, or press the accelerator to
reengage the ACC to the existing set speed.
NOTE:
After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a
standstill for approximately three consecutive
minutes, the parking brake will be activated,
and the ACC system will be cancelled.
While the ACC system is holding your vehicle at
a standstill, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled
or the driver door is opened, the parking brake
will be activated, and the ACC system will be
cancelled.
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor” Warning
The “ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will show
“ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice
and snow, or tunnels with reflective tiles). The
ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left
these areas. Under rare conditions, when the
radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise
Control is still available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The
sensor is located in the center of the vehicle
behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe
the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious
not to damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system
malfunction or failure and require a sensor
realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see an autho-
rized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an
ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system
is no longer present, the system will return to
the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will
resume function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the radar
sensor realigned at an authorized dealer.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/AEB Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and a chime
will sound when conditions temporarily limit
system performance. This most often occurs at
times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy
rain and fog. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such
as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield, driving
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
directly into the sun and fog on the inside of
glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster
display will show “ACC/AEB Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and the
system will have degraded performance.
The “ACC/AEB Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message can sometimes be
displayed while driving in adverse weather
conditions. The ACC/FCW system will recover
after the vehicle has left these areas. Under
rare conditions, when the camera is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rearview
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
functionality is no longer present, the system
will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/AEB Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the
windshield and forward facing camera
inspected at an authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service
Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service
Required”, there may be an internal system
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be
temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try
activating ACC again later, following an ignition
cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may
brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to
stay alert and may need to intervene. The
following are examples of these types of
situations:
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not recommended when
using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no
vehicle in front detected. Once the vehicle is out
of the curve the system will resume your original
set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
The driver must maintain control of the vehicle,
remain alert, and be ready to apply the brakes if
needed.
Turn Or Bend Example
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a
vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed,
vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be
limited.
NOTE:
The driver must maintain control of the vehicle,
remain alert, and be ready to apply the brakes if
needed.
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane in which you are
traveling. In the lane changing example below,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing
lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's
too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC
may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in
the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to
the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the
lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not
react in situations where the vehicle you are
following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead
is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary
Ú page 417.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear, and if equipped, the front
fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when
backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a
parking maneuver). The vehicle brakes may be
automatically applied and released when
performing a reverse parking maneuver if the
system detects a possible collision with an
obstacle.
NOTE:
The driver can override the automatic
braking function by pressing the gas pedal
over 90% of its capacity during the braking
event, turning ParkSense off via the
ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while
the automatic brakes are being applied.
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC
is not available.
Automatic brakes will not be available if there
is a faulted condition detected with the
ParkSense Park Assist system or the Braking
System Module.
The automatic braking function may not
provide enough vehicle deceleration to avoid
colliding with a detected obstacle depending
on vehicle speed, road conditions, and brake
capability.
The automatic braking function may not be
applied fast enough for moving obstacles
that approach the rear of the vehicle from the
left and/or right sides.
The automatic braking function can be
enabled/disabled from the
Customer-Programmable Features section of
the Uconnect system.
ParkSense will retain its last known configu-
ration state for the automatic braking func-
tion through ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to
assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions
with detected obstacles when backing up in
REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
The system is designed to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
The driver must stay in full control of the
vehicle's acceleration and braking and is
responsible for the vehicle's movements.
For limitations of this system and
recommendations, see Ú page 182.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is
enabled at one of these gear selector positions,
the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and
above the system's operating speed, a warning
will appear in the instrument cluster display
indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The six ParkSense sensors (four when vehicle is
not equipped with front sensors), located in the
rear fascia/bumper, and the six ParkSense
sensors located in the front fascia/bumper,
monitor the area in front and behind the vehicle
that is within the sensors’ field of view. The front
sensors detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm)
from the front fascia/bumper. The rear sensors
can detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm)
from the rear fascia/bumper. These distances
depend on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle in the horizontal direction.
Rear Sensor Locations
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the
system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE
or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle
has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right front
or rear regions based on the object’s distance
and location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single arc in
the left and/or right rear region and the system
will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer
to the object, the display will show the single arc
moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow,
to fast, to continuous.
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following charts show the
warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2-
Second Tone
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Fast
(for rear center
only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio
tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected,
the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is
applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be
selected from the Uconnect system
Ú page 210.
If the Uconnect system is equipped, chime
volume settings will not be accessible from the
instrument cluster display.
The chime volume settings include LOW,
MEDIUM, and HIGH.
ParkSense will retain its last known
configuration state through ignition cycles.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected in
the Uconnect system Ú page 210.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display Ú page 121. It
provides visual warnings to indicate the
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/
or front fascia/bumper and the detected
obstacle.
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and
disabled with the ParkSense switch
located below the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the instrument cluster display will
show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the
LED will be on.
NOTE:
When KeySense feature is present, the
ParkSense system will reject customer input to
turn the system off via the switch. The instru-
ment cluster display will show "KeySense in Use
Selected Feature Cannot be Disabled"
message.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
system has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message
for five seconds. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster display will show a "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS",
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" pop up message for five
seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic
will be displayed with a "WIPE OFF" or
“SERVICE” overlay, depending on the location
and fault type. The system will continue to
provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning
properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if
an object is detected within the five second
pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain
displayed for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument
cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper
are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt, and debris to
keep the ParkSense system operating prop-
erly.
Construction equipment, large trucks, and
other vibrations could affect the performance
of ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF.”
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if
you cycle the ignition key.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned
off, the instrument cluster will display “PARK-
SENSE OFF” for five seconds while the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind or in front of the appro-
priate fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind or
in front of the appropriate fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the
ParkSense system off if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are
placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
ParkSense should be disabled when the lift-
gate is in the open position. An opened lift-
gate could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
There may be a delay in the object detection
rate if the object is moving. This may cause
the automatic braking application to be
delayed.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly be disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the vehicle sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
— IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
intended to assist the driver during parallel and
perpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying
a proper parking space, providing audible/
visual instructions, and controlling the steering
wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
maintains control of the accelerator, gear
selector and brakes. Depending on the driver's
parking maneuver selection, the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system is capable of
maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e.,
driver side or passenger side).
NOTE:
The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle, responsible for any
surrounding objects, and must intervene as
required.
The system is designed to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the
driver touches the steering wheel after being
instructed to remove their hands from the
steering wheel, the system will cancel, and
the driver will be required to manually
complete the parking maneuver.
The system may not work in all conditions
(e.g. environmental conditions such as heavy
rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a parking
space that has surfaces that will absorb the
ultrasonic sensor waves).
New vehicles from the dealership must have
at least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated
before the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system is fully calibrated and performs accu-
rately. This is due to the system’s dynamic
vehicle calibration to improve the perfor-
mance of the feature.
The use of wheels and tires that are different
size to the original equipment could affect
the operation of the system.
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE
P
ARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be
enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
Active Park Assist switch, located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
To enable or disable the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system, push the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch
once (LED turns on). Pushing the
switch a second time will disable the system
(LED turns off).
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
turn off automatically for any of the following
conditions:
Parking maneuver is completed.
Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph
(30 km/h) when searching for a parking
space.
Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph
(7 km/h) during active steering guidance into
the parking space.
Steering wheel is touched during active
steering guidance into the parking space.
ParkSense switch is pushed.
The driver’s door is opened.
The liftgate is opened.
Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking
System intervention.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
allow a maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be
completed within eight shifts, the system will
cancel and the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
only operate and search for a parking space
when the following conditions are present:
The gear selector is in DRIVE.
The ignition is in the RUN position.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is
activated.
The driver’s door is closed.
The liftgate is closed.
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
The outer surface and the underside of the
front and rear fascias/bumpers are clean
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active
Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and
then the LED will turn off if any of the above
conditions are not present.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster
display will instruct the driver to slow down. If
the vehicle is driven above approximately
18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The
driver must then reactivate the system by
pushing the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch.
PARALLEL /PERPENDICULAR PARKING
S
PACE ASSISTANCE OPERATION
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is enabled the “Active ParkSense Searching -
Push OK for Perpendicular Park” or “Active
ParkSense Searching - Push OK for Parallel
Park” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display. Push the OK button on the left
side steering wheel switch to change your
parking space setting to parallel or
perpendicular. Once the driver pushes OK for a
perpendicular parking maneuver, the “Active
ParkSense Searching - Push OK for Parallel
Park” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
Active ParkSense Searching -
Press OK for Perpendicular
Active ParkSense Searching -
Press OK for Parallel Park
NOTE:
When searching for a parking space, use the
turn signal indicator to select which side of
the vehicle you want to perform the parking
maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system will automatically search for a parking
space on the passenger's side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
The driver needs to make sure that the
selected parking space for the maneuver
remains free and clear of any obstructions
(e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
The driver is responsible to ensure that the
selected parking space is suitable for the
maneuver and free/clear of anything that
may be overhanging or protruding into the
parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
When searching for a parking space, the
driver should drive as parallel or perpendic-
ular (depending on the type of maneuver) to
other vehicles as possible.
The feature will only indicate the last
detected parking space (example: if passing
multiple available parking spaces, the
system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been
found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will
be instructed to move forward to position the
vehicle for a perpendicular or parallel parking
sequence (depending on the type of maneuver
being performed).
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be
instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and
remove your hands from the steering wheel.
When the vehicle comes to a standstill (your
hands still removed from the steering wheel),
you will be instructed to place the gear selector
into the REVERSE position.
The system may then instruct the driver to wait
for steering to complete before then instructing
to check surroundings and move backward.
Move Backward Into Parallel Parking Space
Move Backward Into Perpendicular Parking Space
The system may instruct several more gear
shifts (DRIVE and REVERSE), with hands off of
the steering wheel, before instructing the driver
to check surroundings and complete the
parking maneuver.
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the
maneuver is complete and the driver will be
instructed to check the vehicle's parking
position, then shift the vehicle into PARK. The
message "Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position" will be displayed momentarily.
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the
brake and accelerator during the semi-auto-
matic parking maneuver.
It is the driver's responsibility to use the
brake and stop the vehicle. The driver should
check their surroundings and be prepared to
stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or
when driver intervention is required.
When the system instructs the driver to
remove their hands from the steering wheel,
the driver should check their surroundings
and begin to back up slowly.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
allow a maximum of six shifts between DRIVE
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be
completed within six shifts, the system will
cancel and the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
manually.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
The system will cancel the maneuver if the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the
parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then
responsible for completing the maneuver if
the system is canceled.
If the system is canceled during the
maneuver for any reason, the driver must
take control of the vehicle.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). It uses a forward looking camera to
detect lane markings and measure vehicle
position within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a
haptic warning in the form of torque applied to
the steering wheel, as well as a visual warning
in the instrument cluster display, to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying force into the steering
wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected
and the driver unintentionally drifts across that
lane marking (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected, a
haptic or a torque warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provide an
audible and visual warning to the driver when
the driver’s hands are not detected on the
steering wheel. The system will cancel if the
driver does not return their hands to the wheel.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing
parallel or perpendicular parking maneuvers
even when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system. Always check carefully behind
and in front of your vehicle, look behind and
in front of you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing
up and moving forward. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention
to your surroundings. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
only a parking aid and it is unable to recog-
nize every obstacle, including small obsta-
cles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles
located above or below the sensors will not
be detected when they are in close prox-
imity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system.
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on,
push the LaneSense button (LED
turns off). A “LaneSense On”
message is shown in the instrument
cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button again (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last
system state on or off from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/
RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument
cluster display.
Instrument Cluster Display
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries
have not been detected and the LaneSense
telltale is solid white.
System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense Telltale is solid white only when the
left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs on the left side.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the visual warning in the
instrument cluster display will show the left
inside lane line flashing yellow (on/off), while
the outside lane line on the left of the display
will remain solid yellow. The LaneSense tell-
tale changes from solid white to flashing
yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Inside Line, Solid
Yellow Outside Line/Flashing) With Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only
the right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines
Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white. The LaneSense
telltale is solid green when both lane
markings have been detected and the
system is “armed” to provide visual warnings
in the instrument cluster display and a torque
warning in the steering wheel if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left inside and outside lane
lines turn solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale
changes from solid green to solid yellow.
At this time torque is applied to the steering
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Inside Line, Solid Yellow
Outside Line) With Solid Yellow Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left inside lane line flashes
yellow (on/off) while the left outside line
remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale
changes from solid yellow to flashing
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of
the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Inside Line,
Solid Yellow Outside Line) With Flashing
Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust
the intensity of the torque warning and the
warning zone sensitivity (Early/Medium/Late)
that you can configure through the Uconnect
system Ú page 210.
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
The warnings are disabled with use of the
turn signal.
The system will not apply torque to the
steering wheel whenever a safety system
engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control
System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward
Collision Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you
to see an on-screen image of the rear
surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen display along with
a caution note “Check Entire Surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds,
this note will disappear. The ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear license plate.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has
programmable modes of operation that may be
selected through the Uconnect system
Ú page 210.
ParkView Camera Location
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the rear camera
mode is exited and the previous screen
appears.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned on), the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to
10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into
PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
A touchscreen button to disable display of the
camera image is made available when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE gear. Display of the
camera image after shifting out of REVERSE
can be disabled via a touchscreen button
personalization entry in the camera settings
menu.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid
on the image to illustrate the width of the
vehicle and its projected backup path based
on the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance
to the rear of the vehicle.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the
Surround View Camera system that allows you
to see an on-screen image of the surroundings
and Top View of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE or a different view
is selected through the touchscreen soft
buttons. The Top View of the vehicle will show
which doors are open. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen display along with
a caution note “Check Entire Surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds,
this note will disappear. The Surround View
Camera system is comprised of four
sequential cameras located in the front grille,
rear liftgate and side mirrors.
NOTE:
The Surround View Camera system has
programmable settings that may be selected
through the Uconnect system Úpage 210.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the
Rear View and Top View is the default view of
the system.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned on), the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to
10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into
PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position. There is a touchscreen button “X” to
disable the display of the camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the Surround
View system is exited and the last known
screen appears again.
Zone
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is
activated through the "Back Up Camera" button
in the Controls menu, and the vehicle speed is
greater than, or equal to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a
display timer for the image is initiated. The
image will continue to be displayed until the
display timer exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will
be displayed continuously until deactivated
via the touchscreen button "X", the transmis-
sion is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
The touchscreen button "X" to disable display
of the camera image is made available ONLY
when the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle,
including the side view mirrors and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel
position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Modes Of Operation
“Manual” activation of the Surround View
system is selected by pressing the Surround
View Camera soft key located in the Controls
screen within the Uconnect system.
Top View
The Top View will show in the Uconnect system
with Rear View and Front View in a split screen
display. There is integrated ParkSense arcs in
the image at the front and rear of the vehicle.
The arcs will change color from yellow to red
corresponding the distance zones to the
oncoming object.
ParkSense Arcs
NOTE:
Front tires will be in image when the tires are
turned.
Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the
image will appear distorted.
Top View will show which sliding doors are
open.
Open front doors will remove outside image.
Rear View
This is the default view of the system
in REVERSE and is always paired with
the Top View of the vehicle with
optional active guidelines for the
projected path when enabled.
Zone
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key
will give the driver a wider angle view
of the Rear View. The Top View will be
disabled when this is selected
Front View
The Front View will show you what is
immediately in front of the vehicle
and is always paired with the Top View
of the vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key
will give the driver a wider angle view
of the Front View. The Top View will be
disabled when this is selected.
Zoom View
When the Rear View is being displayed, and the
vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while
in any gear selector position, Zoom View is
available. By pressing the “magnifying glass”
icon in the upper left of the display screen, the
image will zoom in to four times the standard
view. Pressing the icon a second time will return
the view to the standard Rear View.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is
in REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera
delay will display the standard Rear View. If the
vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear from
DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will
automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available
until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph
(13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or
REVERSE, and speed is greater than or equal
to 8 mph (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavail-
able and the icon will appear grey.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
visible.
Deactivation
The system can be deactivated under the
following conditions:
The speed of the vehicle is greater than
8 mph (13 km/h).
The vehicle shifted into PARK.
The vehicle is in any gear other than
REVERSE and the “X” button is pressed.
The camera delay system is turned off manu-
ally through the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 210.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lenses, clean the
lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft
cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
If a malfunction with the system has
occurred, see an authorized dealer.
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a FamCam
system that consists of an interior monitoring
camera mounted on the headliner that allows
you to view cargo/passengers in the rear
interior of the vehicle in the Uconnect screen.
To activate the feature, press the FamCam
button in the Vehicle Menu of the Uconnect
system Ú page 210. The icon can be dragged
into the “Favorites” bar at the bottom of the
screen for quick access.
The display will show the entire view inside the
vehicle on the left side of the screen, and will show
the selected seat on the right side of the screen.
FamCam Display (10.1-inch Display And
7 Passenger Vehicle Shown)
Press the desired seat on the left side of the
screen. A zoomed-in view of the selected seat
will then display on the right side of the screen.
Touch anywhere on the zoomed-in seat to
zoom out.
The display will appear in color during daylight
hours and will appear black and white during
nighttime.
If you shift into REVERSE or click the “X” on the
screen, the view will close. Otherwise, the
screen will stay on until the operator manually
exits out of it.
NOTE:
If you turn off the FamCam, the view will default
to the last seat you had selected the next time
you turn it on.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the Surround View Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View
should only be used as a parking aid. The
Surround View camera is unable to view
every obstacle or object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using Surround View
to be able to stop in time when an obstacle
is seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using Surround View.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors
inside the pipe seal the system.
1. Put the vehicle in PARK and switch the
ignition OFF.
2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler
door (3 o'clock position) and release to
open.
Fuel Filler Door
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe;
the nozzle opens and holds both flapper
doors while refueling.
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off,
the fuel tank is full.
5. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds
after the nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain
from the nozzle.
6. Remove the fuel filler nozzle.
7. To close the fuel filler door, push the
center-rear edge (3 o’clock position) of the
fuel filler door and then release. The fuel
filler door will latch closed.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel filler door from opening. If this occurs,
lightly push on the fuel filler door around the
perimeter to break the ice build-up.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side
door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), front and rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR), and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH)
number is included on this label and indicates
the Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The
bar code that appears on the bottom of the
label is your VIN.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear GAWR.
Total load must be limited so GVWR and front
and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the
allowable load weight a truck can carry,
including the weight of the driver, all
passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on
the front and rear axles. The load must be
distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR
of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the
components in the system with the lowest load
carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components
sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability does not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full
GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids,
including vehicle fuel, at full capacity
conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your
vehicle on a commercial scale before any
occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the
front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
best be determined by weighing it when it is
loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has
not been exceeded. The weight on the front and
rear of the vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR
of either the front or rear axles has been
exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met.
Store the heavier items down low and be sure
that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all
loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers
and handles and the way the brakes operate.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
TRAILER TOWING
NOTE:
Trailer towing is not permitted for the Plug-in
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV).
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and
tongue weight. The total load must be limited so
that you do not exceed the GVWR
Ú
page 195.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight
of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"
condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR
Ú page 195.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The Frontal Area is the maximum height
multiplied by the maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR.
If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles.
This could cause you to lose control. Also
overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link
that can be installed between the hitch receiver
and the trailer tongue that typically provides
adjustable friction associated with the
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted
trailer swaying motions while traveling.
The electronic TSC (if equipped), recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine
power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A Weight-Carrying Hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are
commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A Weight-Distributing Hitch works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturers directions,
it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a
friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. TSC and a Weight Distributing (load
equalizing) Hitch are recommended for heavier
TW and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with
GAWR requirements.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling,
stability, braking performance, and could
result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you
in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,721 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered
as part of the combined weight of occupants
and cargo, and should never exceed the weight
referenced on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
VEHICLE LOADING CHART
Follow these steps to determine the total weight
the vehicle can carry:
1. Determine the cargo capacity of your
vehicle.
Load Capacity = GVWR – Curb (weight of
vehicle full fluids NO occupants).
2. Determine occupant count.
For calculation purposes, average weight
of an occupant is 150 lb (68 kg).
EXAMPLE:
GVWR = 6,005 lb (2,723 kg)
CURB = 4,500 lb (2,041 kg)
Load Capacity = GVWR – CURB = 6,005 lb
(2,723 kg) - 4,500 lb (2,041 kg) = 1,505 lb
(682 kg)
4 Occupants (at 150 lbs [68 kg]) + Max Trailer =
1,505 lb (682 kg) – 600 lb (272 kg)
(4 x 150 lb [68 kg]) – 360 lb (163 kg) (10%
of 3,600 lb [1,632 kg]) = 545 lb (247 kg) of
cargo in vehicle
Engine/Transmission
Trailer Tow
Package
GCWR (Gross
Combined Weight
Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Weight)
Max. Tongue Weight
3.6L/Automatic
Yes 8,600 lb (3,900 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,600 lb (1,632 kg) 360 lb (163 kg)
No 6,500 lb (2,948 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 1500 lb (680 kg) 149 lb (67 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
Make sure loading does not exceed GAWR of front or rear axles.
GAWR is found on sticker in driver’s side door jamb.
Number Of Persons / Weight Of Occupants
Max Cargo No
Trailer
Tongue Load, Max
Trailer
Max Cargo With
Max Trailer 360 lb
(136 kg) Tongue
Load
2 People / 300 lbs (136) kg
1205 lbs (546 kg)
1,205 lb (546 kg) –
360 lb (136 kg) =
845 lb (383 kg)
845 lbs (383 kg)
4 people / 600 lbs (272 kg)
955 lbs (433 kg)
955 lb (433 kg) –
360 lb (136 kg) =
545 lb (247 kg)
545 lbs (247 kg)
7 people / 1050 lbs (476 kg)
455 lbs (206 kg)
455 lb (206 kg) –
360 lb (163 kg) =
95 lb (43 kg)
95 lbs (43 kg)
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your fascia/bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options or
dealer-installed options must be considered as
part of the total load on your vehicle
Ú page 386.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the
“Scheduled Servicing” Ú page 350. When
towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or
GCWR ratings.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in
the trailer and will not shift during travel.
When trailering cargo that is not fully
secured, dynamic load shifts can occur
that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your
vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used
between your vehicle and trailer. Always
connect the chains to the hook retainers of
the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under
the trailer tongue and allow enough slack
for turning corners.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)
when towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
and GAWR limits.
For further information Ú page 389.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-
equate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the
tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For
four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to
the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following
illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
ping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb
(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own
brakes and they should be of adequate
capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake
pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away
from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. For
increased engine braking on steep downhill
grades, select the LOW range.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy
loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
To avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake
(EPB) engagement, you must ensure that the
Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before
towing this vehicle (if rear wheels are on the
ground). The Auto Park Brake feature is
enabled or disabled via the customer
programmable features Ú page 211.
When towing your vehicle, always follow
applicable state and provincial laws. Contact
state and provincial Highway Safety offices
for additional details.
If your vehicle is disabled and in need of
commercial towing service, for further infor-
mation Ú page 346.
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational Towing
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front
wheels are OFF the ground. This may be
accomplished using a tow dolly (front wheels off the
ground) or vehicle trailer (all four wheels off the
ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the transmission in PARK.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground FWD Models AWD Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires
towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF
the ground.
Ensure that the EPB is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Properly secure the front wheels to the
dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
7. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but
do not start the vehicle.
8. Press and hold the brake pedal.
9. Release the parking brake.
10. Turn the ignition OFF.
11. Release the brake pedal.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the
ground, or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED.
The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle
(behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with
all four wheels OFF the ground.
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Information in this section will aid in safe
controlled launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other
slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to
pull erratically to the right or left. This
phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in
the surface traction under the front (driving)
wheels.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is
possible for a wedge of water to build-up
between the tire and road surface. This is
hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following
precautions should be observed:
Slow down during rainstorms or when the
roads are slushy.
Slow down if the road has standing water or
puddles.
Replace the tires when tread wear indicators
first become visible.
Keep tires properly inflated.
Maintain sufficient distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid
a collision in a sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on
the ground can cause severe transmission
and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause
sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could
lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a
collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
4
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
Flowing/Rising Water
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through shallow standing water, consider the
following Warnings and Cautions before doing so.
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path
where water is flowing and/or rising (as in
storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away
the road or path's surface and cause your
vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to
follow this warning may result in injuries that
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not
exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which
increases stopping distances. Therefore,
after driving through standing water, drive
slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal
several times to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom
of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when
driving through standing water. This will
minimize wave effects.
WARNING! (Continued)
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is
milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine
can cause it to lock up and stall out, and
cause serious internal damage to the
engine. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
209
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display system, refer to
your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle
systems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as
needed. Similar to a computer or other devices,
your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety related
systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB or CD) into your
vehicle if it came from a trusted source.
Media of unknown origin could possibly
contain malicious software, and if installed
in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility
for vehicle systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
5
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about
available Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired
communications cannot be assured. Third
parties may unlawfully intercept information
and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data
Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” Ú page 142.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the Customer Programmable Features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the
instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter
control knob located on the right side. Turn the
control knob to scroll through menus and change
settings. Push the center of the control knob one or
more times to select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen
Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
On the Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch
Display, push and hold the Power button on the
radio’s faceplate for a minimum of 10 seconds
to reset the radio.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
MULTIMEDIA 211
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display
Press the Vehicle button, then press the
Settings tab on the top of the touchscreen. In
this menu the Uconnect system allows you to
access all of the available programmable
features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected
at a time.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired menu.
Once in the desired menu, press and release
the preferred setting option until a check mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Once the setting is
complete, press the Vehicle button to exit to the
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button
on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the available
settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
5
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 MULTIMEDIA
KeySense
The vehicle’s KeySense settings are protected by a unique four-digit PIN, which the vehicle owner creates when accessing the specific settings for the
first time. This four-digit PIN can only be reset by an authorized dealer.
After pressing the KeySense button on the touchscreen, and entering the KeySense PIN, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If Equipped
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW
system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision
is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the
object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system on or off.
The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime when a
collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an
audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
ParkSense — If Equipped
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object
is detected. The “Sound Only” setting will provide an audible chime when
an object is detected. The “Sound and Display” setting will provide both
an audible chime and a visual display when an object is detected.
Front ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The
available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
MULTIMEDIA 213
Language
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system
will display in the chosen language. The available setting is:
Rear ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The
available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist — If Equipped This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is
detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Lights” setting will activate the
Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting
will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Maximum Vehicle Speed
This setting adjusts the Maximum Vehicle Speed. This feature can be set
to 65, 70, 75, 80, or 85 mph (90, 95, 100, 105 or 110 km/h) by using
the “-” and “+” options.
Start Up Fuel Level Message This setting will turn on the Start Up Fuel Level Message on or off.
Earlier Low Fuel Alert This setting will turn on the Earlier Low Fuel Alert on or off.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The
available languages are English, Français, and Español.
5
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 MULTIMEDIA
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
The setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”.
“Manual” allows for more customization with the radio display.
Display Brightness Headlights On
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on.
To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness Headlights Off
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off.
To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
System Text Size
This setting will allow you to change the text on the radio to “Standard”,
“Large”, and “Taller”.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With
GPS must be “Off” for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will
set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to
a 24-hour format.
Voice Options
This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to
“Male” or “Female”.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
MULTIMEDIA 215
Voice Barge-in This setting will allow voice barge-in to be turned on or off.
Show Command List This setting will allow the command list to be shown on or off.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups
This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and
“Off” options.
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-Ups
This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and
“Off” options.
New Text Message Pop-Ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text
messages. This setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls.
This setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Pop-Ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. This
setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Audio Settings This setting will take you to the audio settings for the vehicle profiles.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
default.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
Setting Name Description
5
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 MULTIMEDIA
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the
system set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system
automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will
allow the user to adjust the brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Keyboard
This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable
keyboards are “ABCDEF Keyboard”, “QWERTY Keyboard”, and “AZERTY
Keyboard”.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
MULTIMEDIA 217
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Control Screen Timeout
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically
after five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-Ups Displayed in Cluster
This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-Ups — If Equipped
This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-Ups in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Units
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L),
“Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Capacity”
(Gal [US], Gal [UK], or L) units of measurement independently.
5
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Description
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the command list on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the command list. The “With Help” setting will
show the command list and provide a brief description of what the
command does. The “Never” setting will turn the command list off.
Wakeup Word
This setting will allow you to turn the voice recognition “Wake Up” word on
or off.
Voice Barge-In
This setting will allow you to turn the voice recognition barge-in feature on
or off.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The
system will control the time via the GPS location.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With
GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will
set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to
a 24-hour format.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
MULTIMEDIA 219
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be
off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must
be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the
minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Surround View Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the surround view camera when
shifting out of REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the surround view camera guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the rear backup camera when
shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the backup camera active guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the fixed camera backup guidelines on or off.
5
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — Located In Automatic Emergency
Braking Sub-Menu
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW
system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is
detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the
object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking
Sub-Menu
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The
“Off” setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting
will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The
“Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and
apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking — Located In Automatic Emergency
Braking Sub-Menu
This setting will turn the pedestrian emergency braking system on or off.
LaneSense Warning
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will
provide lane departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”,
“Medium”, and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback
during a lane departure. The available setting are “Low”, “Medium”,
and “High”.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
MULTIMEDIA 221
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected. The “Sound Only” setting will provide an audible chime when
an object is detected. The “Sound and Display” setting will provide both
an audible chime and a visual display when an object is detected.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The
available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The
available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Sliding Door Alert This setting will turn the Sliding Door Alert on and off.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is
detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot
Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the
outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights
on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
KeySense This setting will access KeySense features.
Setting Name Description
5
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 MULTIMEDIA
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position
when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. The available settings
are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Folding Side Mirrors
This setting will automatically fold and unfold the side-view mirrors when
the vehicle is turned on and off. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the rain sensing auto wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
MULTIMEDIA 223
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the
country of the vehicle purchased.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the
headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available
settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the
headlights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings
are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Flash Lights With Sliding Door
This setting will flash the lights when the sliding door reverses. The
available options are “On” and “Off”.
5
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
The Auto Door Locks feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds
12 mph (20 km/h). The Auto Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see
an authorized dealer for service.
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when
the vehicle reaches 12 mph (19 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from
the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the
key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button
is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the
Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from
the key fob.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
MULTIMEDIA 225
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key
fob are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only
unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All
Doors” setting will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock
button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless
Enter-N-Go) on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that
have been linked to the key fob.
Power Liftgate Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising
or lowering. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Sliding Door Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the sliding door reverses or
sense an obstacle. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Flash Lights with Sliding Door
This setting will flash the lights when the sliding door is opening.
Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Hands-Free Power Liftgate
This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open or close
the power liftgate. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Hands-Free Power Sliding Door
This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open or close
power sliding doors. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
5
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort
When the Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote
start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With
Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats
(if equipped) or heated steering wheel (if equipped) when the vehicle is
remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the
comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the
comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will
activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Easy Exit Seats
This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the
engine is shut off. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
3rd Row Seat Recline Lockout
This setting will activate the 3rd row seat recline lockout. Selectable
options are “Off”, “Lock On Ignition”, and “Always Locked”.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
MULTIMEDIA 227
Key Off Options
When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only
activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine
is turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate.
The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain
on after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount
of time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
5
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change
the audio location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/
back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set
audio location.
Equalizer
This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher
setting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The
available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through
the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play
This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
MULTIMEDIA 229
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external
audio device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The settings are
“Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default),
and “Custom Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All
This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb All” settings menu. The
available options are “On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones
This setting will enable or disable two active phones with the vehicle. The
setting options are “On” and “Off”.
5
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 MULTIMEDIA
Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
Setting Name Description
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the “App Favorited” pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the “App Unfavorited” pop-up on or off.
New Text Message Pop-Ups
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of
any connected phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any
connected phone on or off.
SiriusXM® Travel Link Weather Alerts
The setting turns receiving notifications for SiriusXM® Travel Link
Weather Alerts on or off.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
MULTIMEDIA 231
SiriusXM® Setup
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can
be used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune
to a music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel
list will display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM®
Travel Link is a separate subscription.
5
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 MULTIMEDIA
Accessibility — If Equipped
When pressing the Accessibility button on the touchscreen, the system will display options related to the vehicle’s theater system.
Software Updates
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display information on updating the Uconnect system’s software.
Setting Name Description
Accessibility
The “Accessibility” feature announces a function prior to performing the
action selected when using DVD/Blu-ray™ and USB Video functions,
when it is activated. For example, when activated, and the Play button is
selected, the system will announce “Play button selected”, and then once
pressed again the Play button will perform its action.
Video Button Readback This setting will turn the Video Button Readback feature on or off.
Setting Name Description
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi
This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable
options for the setting are “On” and “Off”.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
MULTIMEDIA 233
Restore Settings To Default
When the Restore Settings To Default button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system
back to its default settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
System Information
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings to Default
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their
factory default.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all
personal data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Setting Name Description
Software License
When this feature is selected, a “Software License” screen will appear,
displaying the system software version.
5
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT THEATER — UCONNECT 5/5 NAV
WITH 10.1-INCH DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)
UCONNECT THEATER OVERVIEW
Your Uconnect Theater is designed to give your
family years of enjoyment.
There are multiple ways to interact with your
Uconnect Theater system:
Play your favorite CDs, DVDs, or Blu-ray™
Discs
Plug and play a variety of standard video
games or devices into the HDMI port
Listen to audio over the wireless headphones
Plug and play a variety of devices into the
Video USB port
Plug in standard headphones to listen to
audio
Project your mobile phone or tablet screen
onto the rear Uconnect Theater touchscreens
Please review this Owner's Manual to become
familiar with its features and operation.
GETTING STARTED
Uconnect Theater Screen
There are three different ways to operate the
features of the Uconnect Theater:
The Remote Control
The Uconnect System
The Individual Uconnect Theater Touch-
screens
ACCESSING THE SYSTEM FROM THE
U
CONNECT SYSTEM
You can access your Uconnect Theater system
from the radio touchscreen following the steps
below:
Option 1
1. Press the Media button.
2. Press the Rear Seat button icon.
Option 2
1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Uconnect Theater button on the
touchscreen. You may need to navigate to
different pages in the Apps drawer to find
the Uconnect Theater button.
1 — Uconnect Theater Touchscreen
(Rear Touchscreen)
2 — Uconnect System (Front Touchscreen)
3 — Uconnect Theater Media Hub (Headphone
Jack, HDMI Input, USB Charge Only Port)
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
MULTIMEDIA 235
UCONNECT THEATER CONTROLS
Uconnect Theater Summary Screen (Front
Touchscreen)
Parents can control certain features of the
system with the Uconnect Theater Controls
screens, right from the Uconnect touchscreen
radio. Options include:
Change media sources or select Apps by
using the drop-down list
Lock one or both screens
Mute an individual screen or both screens
Turn “On/Off” one or both screens
View media showing on a specific screen
while gear selector is in PARK
Listen in to a particular Uconnect Theater
screen through the vehicle’s sound system
by selecting the “Listen In” feature after
selecting the “Press to Enter” option.
ACCESSING THE SYSTEM FROM THE
U
CONNECT THEATER REAR SCREENS
You can also access your Uconnect Theater
system from the screens from the steps below:
1. Lift screen upward; the system will
automatically power on.
NOTE:
A message asking if you would like to pair a
remote will pop up if one has not already been
paired to the system.
2. If “YES” is selected to pair a remote, push
any button on the remote and pairing will
immediately start.
3. If “NO” is selected, the Uconnect Theater
home screen will pop up.
1 — Power All On/Off (Controls Both Screens)
2 — Mute All On/Off (Controls Both Screens)
3 — Source Drop-Down List for Current Screen
4 — Lock All On/Off (Controls Both Screens)
5 — Power On/Off for Current Screen
6 — Mute On/Off for Current Screen
7 — Lock for Current Screen
5
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
There will be a touchscreen notification
message when pairing is successful.
Test to make sure the remote is successfully
paired by dragging your finger across the
gesture pad. If you do not see the On-screen
arrow, try using the Screen button on the
remote to switch between screen 1 and
screen 2 to make sure the remote is
controlling the intended screen. It may take
several seconds for the remote to react when
initially paired.
PAIRING THE REMOTE
Remote Pairing (Rear Touchscreen)
If the remote needs to be paired to your
Uconnect Theater system, follow the procedure
below:
1. Install batteries into both remotes.
2. Press the Settings icon found in the lower
right portion of the Uconnect Theater
touchscreen.
3. Press the Remote button towards the
bottom of the Uconnect Theater
touchscreen, within the Settings menu.
4. Press the Pair Remote option. Press the OK
button. A touchscreen notification will
appear indicating that your remote has
been paired successfully or unsuccessfully.
5. Test to make sure the remote is
successfully paired by dragging your finger
across the gesture pad. If you do not see the
On-Screen arrow, try using the Screen
button on the remote to switch between
screen 1 and screen 2 to make sure the
remote is controlling the intended screen. It
may take several seconds for the remote to
react when initially paired.
NOTE:
If pairing fails, try resetting the remote by
pushing and holding the Play/Pause, Down
Arrow, and the Screen button simultaneously
for about five seconds until the back light
flashes.
If the remote is ever non-operational, try
re-pairing the remote.
The system can accommodate up to 10
paired remote controls.
UNPAIRING THE REMOTE
In events such as updating the Uconnect
Theater software, or taking a remote to another
vehicle, the remote will need to be unpaired
from your Uconnect Theater system. To unpair
the remote:
1. Press the Settings icon found in the lower
right portion of the Uconnect Theater
touchscreen.
2. Press the Remote button towards the
bottom of the Uconnect Theater
touchscreen, within the Settings menu.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
MULTIMEDIA 237
3. Select Manage Remote Controls from the
Remote section of "Settings” and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
unpairing process.
4. Once complete, the remote will be ready to
pair again.
NOTE:
There will be a touchscreen notification
message when unpairing is successful. Repeat
the above steps to unpair a second remote.
MEDIA SOURCES
Media Source Selection (Front Touchscreen)
Users can select content for each screen from
the front radio touchscreen by choosing desired
content from the “Select Input” drop-down
menu. Options include “Blu-ray™ Disc”, “HDMI”,
“USB”, “Apps”, and “Viewing the other rear
screen”.
NOTE:
Use the “View Screen” function to pull content
from one screen to the other with a single press
of a button. Doing this however will disable and
gray out certain player controls on the screen
viewing the other screen's content.
1 — Screen 2 Source Selection Drop Down
2 — Selected Source Screen 1
5
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT THEATER REMOTE CONTROL
Remote Control
1.
Screen Indicator
— Indicates which screen
(1 or 2) is being controlled by the remote
control.
2. Power Button — Turns the screen for the
selected channel on or off.
3. Back Button — Push to exit out of menus or
return to previous screen.
4. Screen Selector Button — Push the screen
selector to toggle between screen 1 (Driver
Side), or screen 2 (Passenger Side).
5. OK Button — Push to select the highlighted
option in a menu.
6. Fast Rewind Button — Push and hold
to fast rewind through the current audio
track or video chapter. Push once to revert
back to the previous track.
7. Gesture Pad — Control pointer position by
running your finger over this area and tapping
to select items on the touchscreen, functions
similar to a computer/laptop mouse.
8. Mute Button — Mutes headphone audio.
9. Home Button — Push to access available
“Sources”.
10. Arrow Buttons — Push the Arrow
buttons to highlight an item or scroll
through menus.
11. Fast Forward Button — Push and
hold to fast forward through the current
audio track or video chapter. Push once to
skip to the next track.
12. Play/Pause Button — Begin/resume or
pause disc play.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
Each remote control requires two AAA batteries
for operation.
To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the
back of the remote, then slide the battery
cover downward.
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery
recycling procedures for your area.
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient
them according to the polarity diagram
shown inside the battery compartment.
4. Replace the battery compartment cover.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
MULTIMEDIA 239
UCONNECT THEATER HOME SCREEN
A
ND CONTROLS
Uconnect Theater Home Screen (Rear Touchscreen)
Source Card Selection (Rear Touchscreen)
You can choose sources such as HDMI, USB,
Apps, or Blu-ray™. You may also view content of
the opposite screen in one step by choosing the
“View Screen” source card.
NOTE:
Source card order can be changed by
pressing the Settings button on the touch-
screen and scrolling down to "Source Card
Order".
Use the “View Screen” function to pull
content from one screen to the other in a
single press of a button. Doing this however
will disable and gray out certain player
controls on the screen viewing the other
screen's content.
General Settings
To change source card order, select “Source
Card Reorder”, then press and hold source card
on the touchscreen, and drag and drop in
desired order.
You can also adjust settings such as:
Brightness
Media port lighting on and off
Clock on and off
NOTE:
System information can also be displayed
under General Settings.
Remote Settings
Under this setting, you can access the following:
Manage Remotes (this allows you to unpair
remotes)
Pair Remote
Remote sensitivity (this adjusts the speed
and sensitivity of cursor on screen when
using gesture pad) Ú page 417.
1 — Source Cards
2 — Search Button (Front USB Media Search)
3 — Home Button
4 — Rear Climate Control Button
5 — Wired Headphone Volume
6 — Source Card Page Indicator
7 — Toggle Button List And Icon View
8 — Settings Button
9 — Power Button
5
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 MULTIMEDIA
PLAY A DVD/B LU-RAY™ OR USB
M
EDIA FILE FROM UCONNECT SYSTEM
1. Insert a Blu-ray™ Disc or DVD disc into the
disc player with the label facing up, or
insert a USB drive into rear Video USB port.
NOTE:
The DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc player and Video USB
port are both located under the radio controls in
the instrument panel.
2. Press the Uconnect Theater button on the
radio touchscreen Ú page 234.
3. Select Disc or USB from the source controls
(i.e. select the desired source from the
“Select Input 1” or “Select Input 2” menu
for the respective screen).
4. For DVD/Blu-ray™ disc – press the “Press to
Enter” feature in the Movie Snapshot on the
radio touchscreen, then press OK on the
following screen. The steps to start a DVD
are dependent on the steps required by that
specific DVD. For USB Media Files — Press
Music, Movie, or Folders, then select media
title from list(s).
5. To play a DVD/Blu-ray™ disc on both
screens simultaneously, select Disc from
both screen drop downs, or choose Disc
Source on one screen and push the View
Screen button on the other.
DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc Player
Source Controls From The Uconnect System —
Uconnect Theater (Front Touchscreen)
Uconnect System Media Control Screen
(Front Touchscreen)
1 — DVD/Blu-ray Player
2 — Rear Entertainment USB Ports
1 — Power Button
2 — Mute Button
3 — Screen Lock Button
4 — View Button
5 — Listen In Button
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
MULTIMEDIA 241
NOTE:
After selecting “Press to Enter” or the Movie
Snapshot, the control functions for that screen
appear. These controls only apply to the indi-
vidual screen selected and include:
1. Power
Press to turn “Selected Screen” On/Off.
2. Mute
Mute headphones for selected source for
the current ignition cycle. Pressing mute
again will unmute headphones.
3. Lock
Press to enable/disable Remote Control
functions and Rear Touchscreen Controls
for the selected source.
4. View
Select this button to view full screen video if
vehicle is not moving. Button is disabled
when not viewing a video source or when
the vehicle is in motion.
5. Listen In
Select this button to play one of the rear
screen’s audio over the vehicle’s audio system.
NOTE:
To view video content on the radio screen, bring
the vehicle to a stop.
DISC MENU
When listening to a CD Audio disc, CD Data disc,
DVD, or Blu-ray™, pushing the remote control’s
Arrow buttons will navigate the cursor on the
rear touchscreen in the desired direction, on
whichever touchscreen is selected. The UP,
DOWN, LEFT, and RIGHT Arrow buttons, and the
OK and MENU buttons on the remote, along
with the corresponding buttons overlaid on the
radio touchscreen, can be used to navigate the
disc menu when it appears. This can be used to
select specific chapters in a movie, to navigate
special features, or to play the movie from the
menu.
NOTE:
Inserting a disc into the player will “auto play”
the disc if already in the “Disc" source menu on
the rear screens, and the disc supports “auto
play.”
BLU-RAY™ CONTROLS – DISC-SPECIFIC
F
UNCTIONS
The four colored buttons (red, green, blue,
yellow) are designed for use with certain
Blu-ray™ disc movie titles to access particular
features or software on the disc. See the
documentation provided with your Blu-ray™
disc movie to see if these buttons can be used.
The 5-way control buttons located to the right of
the four colored buttons, are used to navigate
and select items in the disc’s menu, like play
movie, scene selection, etc.
5
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 MULTIMEDIA
Blu-ray™ Controls – Disc Specific Functions
(Rear Touchscreen)
UCONNECT THEATER APPS
Apps Home Screen (Rear Touchscreen)
Sudoku App Home Screen (Rear Touchscreen)
Select the Apps source card to play preloaded
games. Pressing the Help button teaches users
how to play each game. Pick from games:
Back Seat Bingo
Checkers
Hanging Fruit
License Plate Game
Math Flash Cards
Solitaire
Sudoku
Tic Tac Toe
Chess
Concentration
NOTE:
To exit a game, press Exit button then Back
Arrow, or Home button on the touchscreen.
1 — Red Button
2 — Green Button
3 — Blue Button
4 — Yellow Button
5 — Move 5-Way Controls Button
6 — 5-Way Control Buttons
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
MULTIMEDIA 243
Are We There Yet? — Uconnect 5 NAV
Are We There Yet? App (Rear Touchscreen)
When a navigation route has been set from the
Uconnect system, the second row passengers
can use “Are We There Yet?” for an animated
screen showing distance and time remaining on
navigation routes, as well as the estimated time
of arrival with pop-up notifications. Notifications
and their frequency can be set up for route
information by using the Arrow buttons, and can
be turned on and off using the “Notifications”
button on the “Are We There Yet?” App.
Estimated time of arrival notifications pop up at
the bottom center of the screen.
USING THE REAR VIDEO USB PORT
Plug in a USB drive or mass storage device and
play your favorite music or movies.
NOTE:
To view USB media on the rear theater screens,
insert a USB drive into the port next to the DVD/
Blu-ray™ Disc player. The USB drive port is
located under the radio controls in the instru-
ment panel.
Search Screen (Rear Touchscreen)
On the rear screen you can browse the content
of the USB device by going to the USB source.
Use the search feature to find your music faster.
1 — Decrease Timing Between Notifications
Button
2 — Notifications ON/OFF Button
3 — Increase Timing Between Notifications Button
4 — Arrival Time
5 — Time Remaining Until Destination Is Reached
6 — Distance Remaining
5
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 MULTIMEDIA
PLAY VIDEO GAMES
Connect the video game console to the HDMI 1
or 2 ports, located behind the first row seat.
AUX/HDMI/USB
NOTE:
Certain high-end video games will exceed the
power limit of the vehicle's Power Inverter
Ú page 97.
HEADPHONES OPERATION
The headphones receive two separate channels
of audio using an infrared transmitter from the
video screens.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume
control, there are a number of things that can
be done to troubleshoot the issue:
Verify that the screen is turned on.
Check to see that the channel is not muted.
Make sure that the headphones are on.
Verify that the headphone channel selector
button is on the desired channel. This button
switches between the audio of screen 1 and
screen 2.
Install two new AAA type batteries in the
headphones.
Uconnect Theater Headphones
The headphone power indicator and controls
are located on the right ear cup.
NOTE:
Uconnect Theater must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To
conserve battery life, the headphones will auto-
matically turn off approximately three minutes
after the Uconnect Theater system is turned off.
1 — Headphone Jack (Headphone Output Only)
2 — HDMI Port
3 — USB Port (Charge Only)
1 — Power ON/OFF Button
2 — Volume Control Wheel
3 — Channel Selector Button
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
MULTIMEDIA 245
Changing The Audio Mode For Headphones
1. Ensure the remote control and the
headphones are on the same channel.
2. Push the Home button on the remote
control.
3. When the Home menu appears on the
touchscreen, use the Arrow buttons on the
remote control to navigate to the available
modes and push the OK button to select the
new mode or use the Gesture Pad at the top
of the remote control.
Headphone Channel Selector Button
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA
batteries for operation.
To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left
ear cup of the headphones, and then slide
the battery cover downward.
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery
recycling procedures for your area.
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient
them according to the polarity diagram
shown inside the battery compartment.
4. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty
covers the initial user or purchaser ("you" or
"your") of this particular Aptiv PLC (“Aptiv”)
wireless headphone ("Product"). The warranty is
not transferable.
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This
warranty lasts as long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as
specified below, this warranty covers any
Product that in normal use is defective in
workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This
warranty does not cover any damage or defect
that results from misuse, abuse or modification
of the Product other than by Aptiv. Foam
earpieces, which will wear over time through
normal use, are specifically not covered
(replacement foam is available for a nominal
charge). APTIV IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY
RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE
OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS APTIV
LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF
ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some
states and jurisdictions may not allow the
exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation
may not apply to you. This warranty gives you
specific legal rights. You may also have other
rights, which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
5
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 MULTIMEDIA
What Will Aptiv Do? Aptiv, at its option, will
repair or replace any defective Product. Aptiv
reserves the right to replace any discontinued
Product with a comparable model. THIS
WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS
PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS,
AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES
(EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY FOR MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments
regarding your Aptiv wireless headphones,
please email hpser[email protected] or phone:
888-293-3332.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
When watching a video source, pressing the
Settings icon on the touchscreen activates
the Settings menu. These settings control the
appearance of the video on the screen. The
factory default settings are already set for
optimum viewing, so there is no need to change
these settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, use one of the
touchscreens or remote. To reset all values
back to the original settings, select “Reset to
Defaults”, then select “YES.”
LISTENING TO AUDIO WITH THE SCREEN
C
LOSED
To listen to only the audio portion of the channel
with the screen closed:
Set the audio to the desired source and
channel.
Close the video screen.
When the screen is reopened, the video
screen will automatically turn back on and
show the appropriate display menu or media.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio
heard, verify that the headphones are turned on
(the ON indicator is illuminated) and the
headphone selector switch is on the desired
channel. If the headphones are turned on, push
the remote control’s power button to turn audio
on. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the
headphones.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Rear Climate Controls can also be
controlled using the Uconnect Theater system
Ú page 75.
Rear Climate Controls
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
MULTIMEDIA 247
Icon Description
ON
Climate Control ON Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls.
OFF
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will
cause the system to switch between Manual mode and Automatic mode.
Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Press the button on the touchscreen to increase or decrease
the temperature. The temperature will get warmer as you move up toward the red arrow and colder as you move down toward the
blue arrow.
Headliner
Mode
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air
vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level
Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from
the floor outlets.
5
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 MULTIMEDIA
ACCESSIBILITY — IF EQUIPPED
Accessibility is a feature of the DVD/Blu-ray™/
USB Video system that announces a function
prior to performing the action.
WIRELESS STREAMING — IF EQUIPPED
Your Uconnect Theater system may be
equipped with Wireless Streaming functionality
that allows you to project your smartphone or
tablet onto your rear Uconnect Theater
touchscreens. This Source Card will allow you to
wirelessly link your compatible Android™
devices to your Uconnect Theater system and
stream your device onto the touchscreens.
Choose the Wireless Streaming Source Card on
your rear Uconnect Theater touchscreen.
Wireless Streaming Source Card (Rear Touchscreen)
The first-row passengers can also access
wireless streaming by choosing the source in
the Uconnect Theater menu on the front
Uconnect touchscreen.
Streaming Source On Front Uconnect Touchscreen
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available.
Adjusting the blower will cause Automatic mode to switch to Manual operation.
Icon Description
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
MULTIMEDIA 249
NOTE:
For system compatibility, consult your device's
Owner's Manual or www.uconnectphone.com to
see if your device supports wireless streaming
technology compatibility. Apple® devices do not
support this feature.
To link your device to the rear Uconnect Theater
touchscreens:
1. Enable your device’s Wi-Fi.
2. Select the Wireless Streaming feature on
your device. The name of this feature is
device dependent and could include: mirror,
cast, or smart view.
NOTE:
Refer to your device's Owner’s Manual or
www.uconnectphone.com
for further information.
3. Select “Pacifica Wireless Network” from the
list of available networks on your device.
4. When prompted by an Authentication
Screen, press Accept on the touchscreen to
begin wireless streaming on your device. If
prompted, verify that the code on the rear
touchscreen and the device match.
Streaming Device Source Card (Rear Touchscreen)
Your phone will be added as an additional
Source Card on the Uconnect Theater
touchscreens.
NOTE:
The Authentication Screen will appear on both
rear touchscreens. The touchscreen screen on
which “Accept” is selected will be the primary
controller for the wireless streaming session.
NOTE:
Some devices will allow you to control your
device through the Uconnect Theater rear
touchscreens. They will react to your selec-
tions from the touchscreen and be repre-
sented on your device as well. When
supported, the Uconnect Theater task bar will
appear at the top and bottom of the
Uconnect Theater touchscreen, framing your
streaming device.
Devices that do not support this feature will
not respond to Uconnect Theater touch-
screen but can still be controlled using the
streaming device.
Settings
Below is a list of the settings available for the
Wireless Streaming feature of your Uconnect
Theater system:
Wireless Streaming Settings
5
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 MULTIMEDIA
Wireless: ON/OFF – Turn on and off the wire-
less feature of the Uconnect Theater system.
Manage Devices – Allows the user to delete
the paired devices.
Local Network Name – Allows the user to
rename the Pacifica Wireless Network.
Refer to the Wireless Streaming video on the
Uconnect YouTube Channel at
www.youtube.com/DriveUconnect for tips and
additional information on the Wireless
Streaming function.
BD AND DVD REGION CODES
Many BD and DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must
match in order for the disc to play. If the region
code for the BD or DVD disc does not match the
region code for the Blu-ray™ Disc player, the
disc will not play. USA and Canada are set for
BD : code A / DVD : code 1.
Recorded Discs
The Blu-ray™ Disc player will play CD-R and
CD-RW discs recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD
format, or as a CD-ROM containing MP3, AAC or
WMA files. The player will also play DVD-Video
content recorded to a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc.
DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or recorded) are
not supported. Compressed audio and DivX
recorded on DVD is playable.
If you record a disc using a personal computer,
there may be cases where the Blu-ray™ Disc
player may not be able to play some or the
entire disc, even if it is recorded in a compatible
format and is playable on other players. To help
avoid playback problems, use the following
guidelines when recording discs:
Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions
that are closed are playable.
For multi-session CDs that contain only
multiple CD-Audio sessions, the player will
renumber the tracks so each track number is
unique.
For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use
the ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or
Romeo format. Other formats (such as HFS,
or others) are not supported.
The player recognizes a maximum of 2000
files and 255 folders (includes the ROOT
folder) per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
Mixed media recordable DVD formats will
only play the Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that
is playable in the Blu-ray™ Disc player, check
with the disc recording software publisher for
more information about burning playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling
recordable discs (CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is
with a permanent marker. Do not use adhesive
labels as they may separate from the disc,
become stuck, and cause permanent damage
to the DVD player.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3, WMA and AAC)
The Blu-ray™ Disc player is capable of playing
MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3), WMA (Windows
Media Audio) files and AAC (Advanced Audio
Coding) from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or
CD-RW) or DVD Data disc (usually a DVD-R or
DVD-RW).
The Blu-ray™ Disc player always uses the file
extension to determine the audio format, so
MP3 files must always end with the extension
“.mp3” or “.MP3” and WMA files must always
end with the extension “.wma” or “.WMA”
and AAC files must always end with the exten-
sion and “.aac” or “.AAC” or “m4a”. To
prevent incorrect playback, do not use these
extensions for any other types of files.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
MULTIMEDIA 251
For MP3 files, ID3v1, ID3v2 tag data (such as
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are
supported.
Any file that is copy protected (such as those
downloaded from many online music stores)
will not play. The Blu-ray™ player will auto-
matically skip the file and begin playing the
next available file.
Other compression formats such as MP3 Pro,
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The
Blu-ray™ player will automatically skip the file
and begin playing the next available file.
If you are creating your own files, the recom-
mended fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between
32 and 320Kbps and the recommended fixed
bit rate for WMA files is between 16 and
192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also supported.
For both formats, the recommended sample
rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
To change the current file, use the remote
control “Seek Forward” or “Seek Back”
buttons to return to the start of the current or
previous file.
AAC (MPEG-4 AAC, Low Complexity Profile)
support.
AAC HE v1 (AAC High Efficiency v1 aka. AAC/
MPEG4v2 AAC+) support.
HE-AAC v1, v2 support.
Disc Errors
If the Blu-ray™ Disc player is unable to read the
disc, a "Disc Error" message is displayed on the
rear screen and Radio displays. A dirty,
damaged, or incompatible disc format are all
potential causes for a "Disc Error" message.
If a disc has a damaged track which results in
audible or visible errors that persists for two
seconds, the Blu-ray™ Disc player will attempt
to continue playing the disc by skipping forward
one to three seconds at a time. If the end of the
disc is reached, the Blu-ray™ Disc player will
return to the beginning of the disc and attempt
to play the start of the first track.
The Blu-ray™ Disc player may shut down during
extremely hot conditions, such as when the
vehicle’s interior temperature is above 140°F
(60°C). When this occurs, the player will display
"High Temp" and will shut off the rear seat
displays until a safe temperature is reached.
This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics
of the Blu-ray™ Disc player.
PRODUCT AGREEMENT
Open Source Software
The software built into this product are
composed of multiple software components,
and there are the copyrights of our company or
third parties in each software component. Also,
in this product, the following open source
software has been installed:
The licensed software for our company is
based on GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
V2.0 ("GPL").
The licensed software for our company is
based on GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC
LICENSE V2.1 ("LGPL").
The software which has the copyrights of a
third party and is distributed as free software.
Please refer the contract details which are
disclosed in the following websites, for
example, concerning these above software.
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/
gpl-2.0-standalone.html, http://www.gnu.org/
licenses/lgpl-2.1-standalone.html.
5
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 MULTIMEDIA
You have the right of acquisition, modification, and distribution of the source code of the GPL/LGPL software. These are distributed in the hope that it
will be useful by itself. However, including the absence of an implied warranty on the "suitability for a particular purpose" or "merchantability", the
warranty of any kind will not be made. You may download Source Code from the indicating URL by the pressed button of “Open Source Software” on
the Setup Menu. Also, please refrain from contact about the contents of the source code of open source. The source code of the software in which there
are the copyrights of our company or third parties, is not subject to distribution.
Dolby
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
DTS
For DTS patents, see http://dts.com/patents.
Manufactured under license from DTS
Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, DTS and
the Symbol together are registered trademarks,
and DTS 2.0 Channel is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
© DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
DVD
"The DVD logo” is a trademark of DVD Format/
Logo Licensing Corporation." or " DVD logo is a
trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing
Corporation registered in the US, Japan and
other countries."
BDA
“Blu-ray™ Disc, Blu-ray™, BD-Live, BONUSVIEW,
AVCREC and the logos are trademarks of the
Blu-ray™ Disc Association.”
AVCHD
"AVCHD" and the "AVCHD" logo are trademarks
of Panasonic Corporation and Sony®
Corporation.
BD-J
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or
its affiliates.
kernel 2.6.16.29 FreeType 2 2.2.1 gcc sh4eb 3.4.5 glibc 2.3.5 boot_loader sh-ipl +g 1.00
libgcc_s-3.4.5 bash-3.0-31 busybox 1.00 MAKE DEV 1.1.0 module-init-tools 3.1.0
libtermcap 2.0.8 mtd-utils 20050619 initscripts 8.11.1-1 libstdc+ +3.4.5-10 libiconv 1.11
coreutils 6.9 dosfstools 2.10-3 directfb 1.0.0-rc1 kxml 1.21 binutils-sh4eb 2.16.91.0.2
v2lin 0.1 - - - -
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
MULTIMEDIA 253
MPEG
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC
PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A
CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD ("AVC
VIDEO") AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT
WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY
AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO
PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED
FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG
LA, L.L.C. SEE WWW.MPEGLA.COM .
DivX
This DivX Certified® device can play DivX®
Home Theater video files up to 576p (including
.avi, .divx). Download free software at
www.divx.com to create, play and cast digital
videos.
Cinavia
"Cinavia Notice This product uses Cinavia
technology to limit the use of unauthorized
copies of some commercially-produced film and
videos and their soundtracks. When a
prohibited use of an unauthorized copy is
detected, a message will be displayed and
playback or copying will be interrupted. More
information about Cinavia technology is
provided at the Cinavia Online Consumer
Information Center at http://www.cinavia.com/
. To request additional information about
Cinavia by mail, send a postcard with your
mailing address to: Cinavia Consumer
Information Center, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego,
CA, 92138, USA.” “This product incorporates
proprietary technology under license from
Verance Corporation and is protected by US
Patent 7,369,677 and other US and worldwide
patents issued and pending as well as copyright
and trade secret protection for certain aspects
of such technology. Cinavia is a trademark of
Verance Corporation. Copyright 2004-2012
Verance Corporation. All rights reserved by
Verance. Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited Ú page 417.
FCC/IC REGULATORY NOTICES
Modification Statement
Wireless Notice
This device complies with FCC/IC radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment and meets the FCC radio
frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines and
RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure rules. This transmitter must not be
co-located or operating in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
FCC Class B Digital Device Notice
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television
WARNING!
Use of controls or adjustments or
performance of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous
radiation exposure.
5
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 MULTIMEDIA
reception, which can be determined by turning
the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equip-
ment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/
TV technician for help.
CAN ICES-3 (B) / NMB-3 (B)
This Class B digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003 Ú page 417.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This
condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile phone antenna. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your
radio performance does not satisfactorily
“clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation
when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal
wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio Ú page 417.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
255
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability
and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during
braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
that the ABS is working properly each time the
vehicle is started and driven. During this
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound
as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels are
beginning to lock. Road conditions such as ice,
snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop
ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires.
Modification may result in degraded ABS
performance.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a colli-
sion. Pumping makes the stopping distance
longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal
when you need to slow down or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 SAFETY
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning
and that service is required. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to
restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the
ABS Warning Light does not come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction
Control System (TCS).These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) Ready Alert
Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS) and
Trailer Sway Control (TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and
amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results
in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the
brake system is not functioning properly and
that immediate service is required. If the Brake
System Warning Light does not come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
SAFETY 257
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST is a feature of the ESC and Electric Power
Steering (EPS) modules that provides torque at
the steering wheel for certain driving conditions
in which the ESC module is detecting vehicle
instability. The torque that the steering wheel
receives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/
maintain vehicle stability. The only notification
the driver receives that the feature is active, is
the torque applied to the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through
small torques on the steering wheel, which
means the effectiveness of the DST feature is
highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and
overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very
important to realize that this feature will not
steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still
responsible for steering the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The EBD function manages the distribution of
the braking torque between the front and rear
axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear
axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the rear
wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) before the front
axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel
angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to
potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine
power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of
wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions,
leaving the roadway, striking objects or other
vehicles.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability
of the vehicle under various driving conditions.
ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering
of the vehicle by applying the brake of the
appropriate wheel(s) to assist in counteracting
the above conditions. Engine power may also be
reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll
overs, especially those that involve leaving
the roadway or striking objects or other
vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 SAFETY
(Continued)
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning
more than appropriate for the steering
wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning
less than appropriate for the steering wheel
position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
located in the instrument cluster will start to
flash as soon as the ESC system becomes
active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
SAFETY 259
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating
modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used
for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC
modes should only be used for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
When driving with snow chains, or when starting
off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be
desirable to allow more wheel spin. This can be
accomplished by momentarily pushing the ESC
OFF button to enter partial mode “Partial Off”
mode. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by
momentarily pushing the ESC OFF button. This
may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction
and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func-
tionality of ESC (except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section) has
been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator
Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 SAFETY
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
that the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come
on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN position, the ESC system will be on even
if it was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for
a short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order
for HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE (R) gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the trans-
mission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
Ú page 210
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA
is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to
other vehicles, people, and objects, and most
importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
SAFETY 261
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water
buildup on the front brake rotors. It functions
when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI
speed. When RBS is active, there is no
notification to the driver and no driver
interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full
braking during emergency braking situations. It
anticipates when an emergency braking
situation may occur by monitoring how fast the
throttle is released by the driver. The Electronic
Brake Control (EBC) system will prepare the
brake system for a panic stop.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of
each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to
the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce vehicle
power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited
Differential (BLD) functions similarly to a
limited slip differential and controls the wheel
spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a
driven axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more vehicle torque to be
applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD
may remain enabled even if TCS and the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) are in
reduced modes.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with
your trailer, the trailer brakes may be acti-
vated and deactivated with the brake
switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle
and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling
down an incline while resuming accelera-
tion, manually activate the trailer brake or
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to
releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-
mission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 SAFETY
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a
trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight
recommendations Ú page 197.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” mode.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — I F
E
QUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors,
located inside the rear fascia/bumper, to detect
highway licensable vehicles (automobiles,
trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind
spot zones from the rear/front/side of the
vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning
Light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
or REVERSE (R) and enters standby mode when
the vehicle is in PARK (P).
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.7 m). The zone length starts at the outside
rearview mirror and extends approximately
10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper of
the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the
detection zones on both sides of the vehicle
when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer
sway.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
SAFETY 263
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer.
Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is
clear for both your vehicle and trailer before
making a lane change. If the trailer or other
object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment)
extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this
may result in false detections. The BSM
warning light may even remain illuminated
the entire time the vehicle is in a forward
gear.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of
the side mirror Warning Indicator lamps
when a motorcycle or any small object
remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple
of seconds).
The area on the rear fascia/bumper where the
radar sensors are located must remain free of
snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that
the BSM system can function properly. Do not
block the area of the rear fascia/bumper where
the radar sensors are located with foreign
objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
Sensor Location
If the system detects degraded performance
due to contamination or foreign objects, a
message will warn you of a blocked sensor and
the warning indicators in side view mirrors will
be on. The warning indicators will remain
illuminated until blockage clearing conditions
are met. First clear the fascia/bumper area
around the sensors of the blockage. After
removing the blockage, cycle the ignition from
on to off and then back on again to reset the
system.
If the blockage message is still present after
cycling the ignition and driving in traffic, check
again for a blockage.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in
the detection zones by illuminating the BSM
warning light located in the outside mirrors in
addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert
and reducing the radio volume Ú page 266.
Warning Light Location
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 SAFETY
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (side, rear,
front) while driving to see if an alert is
necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle
on either side and enter the rear detection zone
with a relative speed of less than 30 mph
(48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the
vehicle remains in the blind spot for
approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will
be illuminated. If the difference in speed between
the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
SAFETY 265
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, snow banks, car
washes etc. However, occasionally the system
may alert on such objects. This is normal
operation and your vehicle does not require
service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the
vehicle in adjacent lanes Ú page 417.
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing
out of parking spaces where their vision of
oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space
until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The
RCP system will then have a clear view of the
cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is
detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to
objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 SAFETY
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If
the sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver. Additionally, if your vehicle is obscured
by a flat object on one side the system can false
alert on vehicles approaching from the opposite
direction.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE
(R), the driver is alerted using both the visual
and audible alarms, including reducing the
radio volume.
Blind Spot Modes
Three selectable modes of operation are
available in the Uconnect system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only — Default Setting
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal is
then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn
signal and detected object are present on the
same side at the same time, both the visual and
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be
no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM
or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current oper-
ating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each
time the vehicle is started the previously
stored mode will be recalled and used.
The BSM system can work in conjunction with
the Keysense function of the vehicle (if
equipped) Ú page 124.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back
up aid system. It is intended to be used to
help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful
when backing up, even when using RCP.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing
up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
SAFETY 267
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with
audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a
brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and
limited braking are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver
will be provided with audible and visual warn-
ings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon
these progressive warnings, then the system
will provide a limited level of active braking to
help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn-
ings by braking and the system determines that
the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake
force, the system will compensate and provide
additional brake force as required.
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed
below 37 mph (60 km/h), the system may
provide the maximum braking possible to miti-
gate the potential forward collision. If the
Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds
and then release the brakes. If a pedestrian is
encountered in the path at the same speed
threshold, the system will attempt to bring the
vehicle to a stop.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,
the warning message will be deactivated
Ú page 417.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
1 mph (2 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or
sign posts based on the course prediction.
This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To
prevent such misuse of the system, after four
Active Braking events within a key cycle, the
Active Braking portion of FCW will be deacti-
vated until the next key cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 SAFETY
Turning FCW On Or Off
The Forward Collision menu setting is located in
the Uconnect settings.
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is “on”, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you.
Changing the FCW status to “off” deactivates
the system, so no warning or active braking will
be available in case of a possible collision.
NOTE:
The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one key cycle to the next. If the system is
turned off, it will remain off when the vehicle
is restarted.
FCW can work in conjunction with the
KeySense function of the vehicle (if
equipped) Ú page 124.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status
are programmable through the Uconnect
system Ú page 210.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium”
setting and the system status is “Warning &
Braking”. This allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Far", the
system provides possible collision warnings on
objects farther away. This results in earlier
warnings and provides the most reaction time
to avoid possible collisions
By changing the FCW status setting to "Near",
the system provides possible collision warnings
on objects closer to the vehicle. This results in
later warnings and provides less reaction time
than the "Far" and "Medium" settings, which
allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning”
prevents the system from providing limited
active braking, or additional brake support if
the driver is not braking adequately in the
event of a potential frontal collision, but
maintains the audible and visual warnings.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents
the system from providing autonomous
braking, or additional brake support if the
driver is not braking adequately in the event
of a potential frontal collision.
The system will retain the last setting
selected by the driver after ignition shut
down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such
as overhead objects, ground reflections,
objects not in the path of the vehicle,
stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the
same or higher rates of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the
unavailable screens.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
SAFETY 269
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance
is no longer present, the system will return to its
full performance state. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) — If
Equipped
The Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is a
subsystem of the FCW system which provides
the driver with audible and visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display, and may apply
automatic braking when it detects a potential
frontal collision with a pedestrian.
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 37 mph
(60 km/h), the system may provide braking to
mitigate the potential collision with a
pedestrian. If the PEB event stops the vehicle
completely, the system will hold the vehicle at
a standstill for two seconds and then release
the brakes. When the system determines a
collision with the pedestrian in front of you is
no longer probable, the warning message will
be deactivated.
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Turning PEB On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows
the system to warn you of a possible frontal
collision with the pedestrian.
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect
display in the Controls settings Ú page 210.
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian
Emergency Braking button once.
WARNING!
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can
PEB detect every type of potential collision with
a pedestrian. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 SAFETY
To turn the PEB system back on, push the
Pedestrian Emergency Braking button again.
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates
the system, so no warning or active braking will
be available in case of a possible frontal
collision with the pedestrian.
NOTE:
The PEB system will NOT retain the last setting
selected by the driver after ignition shut down.
The system will reset to the default setting when
the vehicle is restarted.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold placard
pressure.
NOTE:
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a graphic showing the pres-
sure values of each tire with the low tire pres-
sure values in a different color, or the Uconnect
radio will display a TPMS message. When this
occurs you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(6.5°C). This means that when the outside
temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle
has not been driven for at least three hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure molded into the tire sidewall. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven. This is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
See Ú page 389 for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low-pressure warning limit for any reason,
including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at
or above the recommended cold placard
pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If
the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately
24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low
enough to turn on the TPMS Warning Light.
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure
to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but
the TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
SAFETY 271
(Continued)
situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value
Ú page 417.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance, or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if
underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning
Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pres-
sures and warning have been established for
the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Unde-
sirable system operation or sensor damage
may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/
or style. The TPMS sensor is not designed for
use on aftermarket wheels and may
contribute to a poor overall system perfor-
mance or sensor damage. Customers are
encouraged to use OEM wheels to assure
proper TPMS feature operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
CAUTION! (Continued)
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 SAFETY
The TPMS consists of the following
components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. The system fault will also
sound a chime. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure
value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS
Warning Light will no longer flash, and the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will no longer
display, and a pressure value will display in
place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors
Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors
Vehicles With Compact Spare — If Equipped
1. The compact spare tire does not have a
Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place
of a road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, upon the next
ignition cycle, the TPMS Warning Light will
remain on and a chime will sound. In
addition, the graphic in the instrument
cluster will still display a different color
pressure value.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display
a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five
seconds and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure value.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
SAFETY 273
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime
will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster
will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message for five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the compact spare, the TPMS will update
automatically. In addition, the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in
the instrument cluster will display a new
pressure value instead of dashes (--), as
long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster
and a chime will sound when tire
pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display an "Inflate to XX"
message and a graphic showing the pressure
values of each tire with the low tire pressure
values in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with low pressure
(those in a different color in the instrument
cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value as shown in the
"Inflate to XX" message. Once the system
receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the pressure values
in the graphic display in the instrument cluster
will return to their original color, and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and
tire assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors,
such as when installing winter wheel and tire
assemblies on your vehicle.
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 SAFETY
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message in the instrument
cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the
pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
equipped with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then turn off. The instrument cluster will
display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
and then display pressure values in place of the
dashes. On the next ignition cycle the "SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be
displayed as long as no system fault exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your
passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured
in the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position Ú page 300.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 300.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
SAFETY 275
(Continued)
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and
deployment occurs, the side air bags will
inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, see Ú page 413 for customer
service contact information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position,
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 SAFETY
(Continued)
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on
the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the
rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until the driver and outboard
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal conditions.
However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and
reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
SAFETY 277
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
WARNING! (Continued)
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
WARNING! (Continued)
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion
could ride too high on your body, possibly
causing internal injuries. Always buckle your
seat belt into the buckle nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grab the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
SAFETY 279
(Continued)
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automat-
ically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front and second row outboard seats the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or
downward to position the seat belt away from
your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
button to release the anchorage, and move it up
or down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up
or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 SAFETY
Second Row Center (If Equipped) And Third
Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions
The second row center (if equipped) and third
row center seat belts feature a seat belt with a
mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the
seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when
the seat is folded. The mini-latch plate and
regular latch plate can then be stored out of the
way in the headliner for added convenience to
open up utilization of the storage areas behind
the front seats when the seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular
latch plate from its stowed position in the
headliner slightly behind the second or
third row seat.
Mini-Latch Stowage
2. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat
belt over the seat.
Mini-Latch Plate
Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
SAFETY 281
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the
left head restraint.
Routing The Rear Seat Belt Latch Plate
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the mini-latch plate into the
mini-buckle until you hear a “click.”
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow
the seat belt to go around your lap.
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
2 — Seat Belt Buckle
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 SAFETY
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Latch Plate And Buckle Connected
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on
the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the
risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so
that it is comfortable and not resting on your
neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack
in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular
latch plate into the center red slot on the
mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the
mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into
its stowed position.
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
(if equipped) is in its lowest position, an
authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be
used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not
required for a different occupant, it must be
removed.
WARNING!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are
not properly connected when the seat belt
is used by an occupant, the seat belt will
not be able to provide proper restraint and
will increase the risk of injury in a collision.
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing
is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted,
follow the preceding procedure to detach
the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle,
untwist the webbing, and reattach the
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
SAFETY 283
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the
air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-
cally required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the
Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use the
Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not
long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not
needed.
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 SAFETY
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is
used to secure a child restraint system. The
figure below illustrates the locking feature for
each seating position Ú page 311.
7 Passenger Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
8 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate
into the buckle until you hear a "click."
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
SAFETY 285
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire seat belt is
extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 SAFETY
Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped
The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped
with a park stitch to raise the latch plate for
easier access to occupants. If the park stitch
interferes with the tight installation of a child
restraint, slide the latch plate over the stitching
to shorten the lap portion of the belt and install
the car seat normally. When the car seat is
removed from the vehicle, slide the latch plate
above the park stitch to enable occupants to
latch the seat belt securely.
Seat Belt Park Stitch Location
Third Row Stow Clip — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a stow clip on
the lower trim behind the third row. This clip is
used to hold the seat belt out of the path of the
power folding third row seat. Only place the seat
belt webbing in this clip while folding and opening
the seat. Do not leave the webbing behind the
clip when using the belt to restrain an occupant.
Third Row Stow Clip
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air
Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
WARNING!
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind
the third row stow clip when using the seat
belt to restrain an occupant. The seat belt will
not be positioned properly on the occupant
and they could be more seriously injured in
an accident as a result.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
SAFETY 287
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch
is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not
inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record
the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag
system is designed to be maintenance free, if any
of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled.
In this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light
is detected, which could affect the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS),
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will illuminate on the instrument panel. The
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until
the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been
detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately
Ú
page 134.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a collision.
If the light does not come on as a bulb check
when the ignition is first turned on, stays on
after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 SAFETY
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has
multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/
Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
SAFETY 289
(Continued)
This vehicle is equipped with a right front
passenger Occupant Classification System
(OCS) that is designed to provide Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to
the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide
additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags,
it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front
air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them manu-
ally. You may damage the air bags and you
could be injured because the air bags may
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags
are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 SAFETY
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is
part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to
the occupant’s seated weight, as determined by
the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
consists of the following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Sensor located in the front passenger seat
Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
located underneath the front passenger seat.
The Sensor is located beneath the passenger
seat cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will
be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input
from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The
OCM communicates this information to the
ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment based on occupant classification.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS
may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates
that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or
has very light objects on it; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
small passenger, including a child; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
rear-facing child restraint; or
The front passenger is not properly seated or
his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a
period of time.
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride
in the front passenger seat and never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deployment
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Reduced-power deployment OR Full-power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deployment
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
SAFETY 291
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCS estimates the
seated weight on the front passenger seat and
where that weight is located. The OCS
communicates the classification status to the
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to
determine whether the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright
Facing forward
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
Sitting with their back against the seatback
and the seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small
Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a
small adult, occupies the front passenger seat,
the OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. This does
not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front
passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be
properly positioned on the front passenger seat.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury or
death. The OCS determines the most probable
classification of the occupant that it detects. The
OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in an
adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean
that the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag. Increasing the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat may result in a
full-power deployment of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 SAFETY
Examples of improper front passenger seating
include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
rest or instrument panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways,
or turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the
full upright position.
The front passenger carries or holds an object
while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front
passenger seat.
Objects are lodged between the front
passenger seat and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated
weight on the front passenger seat are
attached to the front passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the
front passenger seat is seated improperly, the
occupant may provide an output signal to the
OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
SAFETY 293
(Continued)
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument
panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to
classify the front passenger seat status. A
malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation
of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come
on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it
comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical
OCS components that may affect the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the
OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a
front seat passenger, the OCS components
must function as designed. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If
the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service
for any reason, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat
accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly
followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat
assembly or components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat
covers or cushions not designated by FCA US
LLC for the specific model being repaired.
Always use the correct seat cover and
cushion specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with
an aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS
related component or fastener be modified
or replaced with any part except those which
are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teen-
ager or adult in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different from the occupant’s properly
seated weight input. This may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position,
your back against the seatback, sitting
upright, facing forward, in the center of the
seat, with your feet comfortably on or near
the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back-
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front
passenger seat. Holding an object may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different than the occupant’s properly
seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Placing an object on the floor under the
front passenger seat may prevent the OCS
from working properly, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision. Do not
place any objects on the floor under the
front passenger seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 SAFETY
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger
Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column and a
Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag
mounted in the instrument panel below the
glove compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air
Bags provide enhanced protection during a
frontal impact by working together with the seat
belts, pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service proce-
dures to the passenger seat assembly, its
related components, seat cover or cushion
may inadvertently change the air bag
deployment in case of a frontal collision.
This could result in death or serious injury
to the front passenger if the vehicle is
involved in a collision. A modified vehicle
may not comply with required Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities,
contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
SAFETY 295
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain side impact
events.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not
add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 SAFETY
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In
side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy
independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protec-
tion in all collisions. They also help keep
you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
SAFETY 297
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether deployment in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle
experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover
sensing system will deploy the side air bags and
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 SAFETY
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gener-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will
determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enhanced Accident Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the igni-
tion to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and
remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid
draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt
pretensioners cannot protect you in another
collision. Have the air bags, seat belt
pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
SAFETY 299
(Continued)
the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or
damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights) after an accident, reset the system
by following the procedure described below. If
you have any doubt, contact an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident
Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start
after performing the reset procedure, the
vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer
to be inspected and to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle
body structure, or add aftermarket side
steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci-
dentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 SAFETY
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
SAFETY 301
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint
Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached
to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 SAFETY
(Continued)
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types
of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth
until they reach the weight or height limit of the
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle.
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less
than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a
rear support leg in this vehicle. The floor of
this vehicle is not designed to manage the
crash forces of this type of car seat. In a
crash, the support leg may not function as it
was designed by the car seat manufacturer,
and your child may be more severely injured
as a result.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
SAFETY 303
(Continued)
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in
the vehicle by the seat belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no,” then the child still needs to use a booster
seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/
shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
or rearward because it can loosen the child
restraint attachments. Remove the child
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and
one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to
install LATCH-equipped child seats without using
the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions
may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
belt must be used with the top tether anchorage
to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
SAFETY 305
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
7 Passenger Bench Seat LATCH Positions
7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating LATCH Positions 8 Passenger LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH
anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing
or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
SAFETY 307
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with the installation of the child restraint, the head restraint may be folded and the child seat
installed in front of it.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The 2nd row head restraints on bench and the
center head restraint in the 8 passenger vehicle
can be removed if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint. 2nd row Stow
'n Go head restraints are not removable. The
3rd row center head restraint is removable in all
vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard head
restraints are not removable Ú page 55.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 SAFETY
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback,
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion.
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)
7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)
8 Passenger Seating
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Bench Anchorages
Shown) 7 Passenger Bench Seating
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its
upright position when the seat is to be used
by an occupant who is not in a child restraint.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
SAFETY 309
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
There are tether strap anchorages
located behind all second row seating
positions. The third row has a tether
anchor on the 40% seat for the right
outboard position and in the center of the 60%
seat for either the center or left outboard
seating position. All tether anchorages are
located on the back of the seat, near the floor.
Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row Bench
Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row 7 Passenger
Stow ‘n Go Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row 8 Passenger
Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorage
Shown)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 SAFETY
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 4 lower LATCH anchorages in
the third row, rear seat. Anchorages A and B are
used for the right outboard position behind the
front passenger (1). Anchorages C and D are
used for the center seating position (2). The left
outboard position (3) does not have lower
anchorages. Do not
install a child restraint
using anchorages B and C. This is not a LATCH
position in your vehicle.
Center Seat LATCH Positions
If a child restraint installed in the center
position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle
for the outboard position, do not use that
outboard position. If a child seat in the center
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that
outboard position.
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the
instructions below. See Ú page 311 to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
WARNING!
Use anchorages C and D to install a
LATCH-compatible child restraint in the
center seating position (2). Do not install a
LATCH-compatible child restraint using
anchorages B and C. This is not a
LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint.
Please see Ú page 310 for typical installa-
tion instructions.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
SAFETY 311
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 315 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is
designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
and then letting the webbing retract back into
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
for additional information on ALR Ú page 284.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
7 Passenger Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
8 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
SAFETY 313
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward facing
child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the
seat belt to install a forward facing child
restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and
the child restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The 2nd row head restraints on bench and the
center head restraint in the 8 passenger vehicle
can be removed if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint. 2nd row Stow
'n Go head restraints are not removable. The
3rd row center head restraint is removable in all
vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard head
restraints are not removable Ú page 55.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
seat belt against the belt path of the child
restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 SAFETY
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint
interferes with the installation of the child
restraint, the head restraint may be folded and
the child seat installed in front of it.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/
or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its
upright position when the seat is to be used
by an occupant who is not in a child restraint.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
SAFETY 315
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 315 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped
The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped
with a park stitch to raise the latch plate for
easier access to occupants. If the park stitch
interferes with the tight installation of a child
restraint, slide the latch plate over the stitching
to shorten the lap portion of the belt and install
the car seat following the steps above. When
the car seat is removed from the vehicle, slide
the latch plate above the park stitch to enable
occupants to latch the seatbelt securely.
Seat Belt Park Stitch Location
If the park stitch interferes with the lock-off
features of the child restraint, do not use the
lock-off feature. Instead, switch the seat belt to
the locking mode, as described in the steps
above or move the car seat to a different
seating position.
Seat Belt Park Stitch
Installing Child Restraints Using the Top
Tether Anchorage
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See Ú page 304 for the location of approved
tether anchorages in your vehicle.
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 SAFETY
1. Look behind the seating position where
you plan to install the child restraint to find
the tether anchorage. You may need to
move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is
no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
Top Tether Anchorage Locations 2nd Row Bench
Top Tether Anchorage Locations 2nd Row 8 Passenger
Top Tether Anchorage Locations 3rd Row
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the two
posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
SAFETY 317
Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Second Row 7
Passenger Stow ‘n Go Anchorage Shown)
Third Row Tether Attachment
The tether anchorage found on the back of the
60% seat in the third row may be used by either
the left outboard or the center seating position.
Only tether one child restraint to the tether
anchorage at a time.
To connect the tether strap hook to the tether
anchorage for either seating position on the
60% third row seat:
1. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the
anchor and the child seat.
2. If the car seat is in the center, raise the
center head restraint and route the tether
strap around the inboard (left) side of the
head restraint support posts, as shown in
the diagram.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Center Tether Attachment – 3rd Row
Outboard Tether Attachments – 3rd Row
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not connect the tether strap for more than
one child restraint to the tether anchorage on
the 60% seat in the third row. This anchorage
is intended for one child restraint at a time.
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 SAFETY
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
mode. If the light is either not on during starting,
stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light
will illuminate with a single chime when a fault
with the Air Bag System has been detected. It
will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately Ú page 274.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelerator,
brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that
is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle
in other ways.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
SAFETY 319
(Continued)
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the lug nut/bolt torque for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold
inflation pressure.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA US LLC approved
floor mat for the specific make, model, and
year of your vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if
present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
WARNING! (Continued)
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force outside
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
321
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located
in the lower center area of the instrument
panel.
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the switch is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard
Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning
Flashers may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an
SOS and ASSIST button.
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
7
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber Ú page 417.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only func-
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network, which
comes as a built in function. Other Uconnect
services will only be operable if your SiriusXM
Guardian™ service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you
will be connected to a representative for assis-
tance. Roadside Assistance will know what
vehicle is being driven and its location. Additional
fees may apply for roadside assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care –
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for
Radio, Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview
Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To
cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the
cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the SOS and
ASSIST buttons on the Rearview Mirror will
turn green once a connection to a SOS
operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and
a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call
system may transmit the following
important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system
to determine if additional assistance is
needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 323
(Continued)
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS
operator, the SOS operator may be able to
open a voice connection with the vehicle to
determine if additional assistance is
needed. Once the SOS operator opens a
voice connection with the vehicle’s SOS
Call system, the operator should be able to
speak with you or other vehicle occupants
and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.
The vehicle’s SOS Call system will attempt
to remain connected with the SOS oper-
ator until the SOS operator terminates the
connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from an Emergency Services
Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s operable network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable
network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
aftermarket electrical equipment to the
vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system
to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to
fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to help
protect you.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in
Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS
system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located between
the SOS and ASSIST buttons will continuously
be illuminated red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle device requires service. Please
contact an authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are
unavailable or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module
turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant
Restraint Control system immediately.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 325
(Continued)
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
system to function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service
that can immediately connect you with help in
the event that your vehicle’s airbags deploy.
Please refer to your provided radio supplement
for complete information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Place the ignition in OFF mode.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK AND SPARE TIRE LOCATION
The jacking tools, spare tire and portable air
compressor (if equipped) or tire service kit (if
equipped) are stowed behind an access panel
on the left hand side of the vehicle.
Jacking Equipment Location
EQUIPMENT REMOVAL
1. Remove the access panel to the jacking
equipment.
2. Unlatch the Portable Air Compressor or Tire
Service Kit if equipped. Unscrew the wing
nut that is holding the Inflatable Spare Tire
and gently remove it from the storage area.
Remove wrench from foam tray.
NOTE:
Depending on the trim level of the vehicle, the
options for spare tire equipment may vary.
Jacking Equipment
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Tire Service Kit
3 — Wrench
4 — Fuel Filler Funnel
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 327
Jacking Equipment
Jacking Equipment
3. Remove Jack by turning the jack screw
counterclockwise to collapse from storage
area that is located behind the tire.
Jack Location
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Portable Air Compressor
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Portable Air Compressor
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Do not let any passenger sit in the vehicle
when it is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
7
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jack Warning Label
Detailed information about the inflatable spare
tire, its use, and operation Ú page 396.
Extending The Wrench
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
nuts by turning them to the left, one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations
on each side of the vehicle body. These
locations are on the sill flange of the vehicle
body.
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jacking loca-
tions are critical. See below images for proper
jacking locations.
Jacking Locations
Front Lifting Point
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 329
Front Jack Location
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn
clockwise until the jack head is properly
engaged in the described location. Do not
raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack
is securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise, using the swivel wrench. Raise
the vehicle only until the tire just clears the
surface and enough clearance is obtained
to install the compact spare tire. Minimum
tire lift provides maximum stability.
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles
with wheel covers, remove the cover from
the wheel by hand. Do not pry the wheel
cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
6. Install the inflatable spare on the vehicle,
located in the rear cargo area of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack
and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never
get any part of your body under a vehicle that
is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
7
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Mounting Inflatable Spare Tire
NOTE:
Do not install the wheel cover on the inflatable
spare tire.
7. Leave the vehicle on the jack and start
inflating the inflatable spare after the tire has
been mounted to the vehicle. Secure the
wheel to the hub by tightening the nuts with
the wrench. After inflation, once the vehicle is
lowered you will have a second opportunity to
“torque” the lug nuts
Ú
page 405.
8. Inflate the tire to the prescribed pressure
60 psi (4.2 Bar) using the Portable Air
Compressor Ú page 332 or Tire Service Kit
if equipped Ú page 333.
9. Lower the vehicle once the inflatable Spare
has reached its pressure and the
compressor-hose has been removed from
the tire valve.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts
in a star pattern until each nut has been
tightened twice Ú page 405. If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
12. Place the deflated (flat) tire and foam tray
cover assembly in the rear cargo area. Do
not stow the deflated tire in the inflatable
spare tire location. Have the full-sized tire
repaired or replaced, as soon as possible.
13. Stow the jack back in the stowage
compartment and place the access panel
back. The stud of the storage area must be
threaded through the lower part of the jack.
Then turn the Jack Screw clockwise to
secure it in place.
NOTE:
Stow the foam tray and components in the
cargo area.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the inflatable spare tire with
the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle
could be damaged if the inflatable spare tire
is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 331
Storing The Jack
ROAD TIRE INSTALLATION
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel
wheels with wheel covers, install two lug
nuts on the mounting studs which are on
each side of the valve stem. Install the lug
nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with
the valve stem on the wheel. Install the
cover by hand, snapping the cover over the
two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or
excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten all the lug nuts until the
wheel sits flush onto the hub and there is no
play. The nuts will have to be fully tightened
once the vehicle is lowered. Tightening an
improperly seated wheel under vehicle load
can damage the threads, cause vibration,
and undermine safety.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts
in a star pattern until each nut has been
tightened twice Ú page 405. If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or at a service station.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the
wheel.
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
3 — Stud
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Mounting Stud
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
7
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
PORTABLE AIR COMPRESSOR — IF
E
QUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Portable
Air Compressor. Use the Portable Air
Compressor located in the side compartment of
the cargo area to inflate the inflatable tire to
60 psi (4.2 Bar).
Portable Air Compressor
Portable Air Compressor Usage With Inflatable
Spare Tire
1. Remove the Portable Air Compressor from
the storage location.
2. Raise the vehicle as described
in the Jacking Instructions within
this section.
3. Install the Inflatable Spare tire
as described in the Jack
Instructions section in this
manual. Make sure that the valve
stem is located near the ground, and then
screw the air hose of the Portable Air
Compressor to the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the power plug and
connect it the vehicles 12 Volt
power Outlet.
5. Always start the engine before
turning ON the Portable Air
Compressor.
6. Switch the power button ON.
7. Inflate the tire to 60 psi
(4.2 Bar) recommended as per
the label on the wheel or if the
vehicle equipped with the
inflatable spare tire pressure indicated on
the Tire and Loading information label
located on the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire is overinflated, use the deflation
button to reduce the tire air pressure.
8. After the tire reaches the
recommended pressure, lower
the vehicle with the jack as
described in the Jack Instructions
section in this manual.
9. Remove the speed limit label
sticker from the Portable Air
Compressor and place it on the
center of the steering wheel.
10. Return the Portable Air Compressor to the
foam tray and secure it with the strap. Store
the foam tray in the cargo area.
1 — Power Plug
2 — Deflation Button
3 — Pressure Gauge
4 — Power Button
5 — Air Hose
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 333
RETURN INFLATABLE SPARE TIRE
To return Inflatable Spare Tire to its storage
location.
1. Return the Jack.
2. Deflate the spare tire. Use the Tire Service
Kit or Portable Air Compressor and push the
deflation button to do this step. See the
Portable Air Compressor in this section for
additional information. The inflatable spare
tire will return to its original shape.
3. Install the inflatable spare tire back into its
original stowage location and position
facing outward.
4. Install the foam tray with wrench and funnel
installed.
5. Install and tighten the wing nut by hand.
6. Install the Tire Service Kit or Portable Air
Compressor (if equipped) and tighten the
strap.
7. Install access panel door.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire
Service Kit. Small punctures up to 1/4 inch
(6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire
Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures
down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will
provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km)
with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is secured with a strap and is
stored under the load floor within the second row.
Tire Service Kit Location
WARNING!
Do not lift or carry the Portable Air
Compressor by the hose.
Always stow the Portable Air Compressor
only in the provided place.
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may
get hot after use, so it should be handled
carefully.
Keep the Portable Air Compressor away
from open flames or heat source.
7
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the
following symbols to indicate the air or sealant
mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position for air pump
operation only.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position to inject the
Tire Service Kit Sealant and to
inflate the tire.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button
once to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
Push and release the Power Button
again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to
reduce the air pressure in the tire if
it becomes overinflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle
prior to the expiration date (printed at the
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system.
See the Sealant Bottle Replacement in this
section for further information.
The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application
use and needs to be replaced after each use.
Always replace these components immedi-
ately at your original equipment vehicle
dealer.
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid
form, clean water, and a damp cloth will
remove the material from the vehicle or tire
and wheel components. Once the sealant
dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
For optimum performance, make sure the
valve stem on the wheel is free of debris
before connecting the Tire Service Kit.
The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended
to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread/contact surface of your
vehicle’s tires.
1 — Sealant/Air Hose
2 — Hose Accessories
3 — Mode Select Knob
4 — Pressure Gauge
5 — Deflation Button
6 — Power Switch
7 — Sealant Bottle
8 — Power Plug
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 335
(Continued)
(Continued)
The Tire Service Kit Sealant is not intended to
seal punctures on the tires' side walls.
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to
inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with
two needles, located in the Accessory
Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the
air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only
the Air Pump and make sure the Mode Select
Knob is in the Air Mode when inflating such
items to avoid injecting sealant into them.
Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the
hoses.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of
the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough
off the road to avoid the danger of being hit
when using the Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the
vehicle under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is approx-
imately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving
on a flat tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open
flames or heat source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
Tire Service Kit in the place provided.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
WARNING! (Continued)
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair,
eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is
harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately
with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon
as possible, if there is any contact with
clothing.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or
rash, consult a physician immediately.
Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of chil-
dren. If swallowed, rinse mouth immedi-
ately with plenty of water and drink plenty
of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult
a physician immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
the deflated tire) is in a position that is near
to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service
Kit Hose to reach the valve stem and keep
the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground. This
will provide the best positioning of the kit
when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the
vehicle as necessary to place the valve
stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (P) and
cycle the ignition in the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove
the cap from the fitting at the end of the
hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on
the ground next to the deflated
tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and
then screw the fitting at the end of the
Sealant Hose onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and
insert the plug into the vehicle’s
12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before
turning the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob
is to the Sealant Mode position.
3. After pushing the Power Button,
the sealant (white fluid) will flow
from the Sealant Bottle through
the Sealant Hose and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within
0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire
Service Kit off. Disconnect the Sealant Hose
from the valve stem. Make sure the valve
stem is free of debris. Reconnect the Sealant
Hose to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
Select Knob is in the Sealant Mode position
and not Air Mode. Push the Power Button to
turn the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different
12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or
another vehicle, if available. Make sure the
vehicle is running before turning the Tire
Service Kit on.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to
previous use. Call for assistance.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 337
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump
until sealant is no longer flowing
through hose (typically takes
30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant
flows through the Sealant Hose, the
Pressure Gauge can read as high as 70 psi
(4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge will
decrease quickly from approximately
70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
when the Sealant Bottle is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air
into the tire immediately after the
Sealant Bottle is empty. Continue
to operate the pump and inflate
the tire to the cold tire inflation pressure
found on the tire and loading information
label located in the driver-side door
opening. Check the tire pressure by looking
at the Pressure Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi
(1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not
attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for
assistance.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure
or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within
15 minutes:
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
1. Push the Power Button to turn
the Tire Service Kit off.
2. Remove the speed limit label
from the Tire Service Kit and
place sticker on the steering
wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose
from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the
fitting at the end of the hose, and place the
Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage location.
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant
and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle
5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to
ensure distribution of the Tire Service
Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not exceed
50 mph (80 km/h).
After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers.
Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
the deflated tire) is in a position that is near
to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service
Kit Hose to reach the valve stem and keep
the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground. This
will provide the best positioning of the kit
when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the
vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem
in this position before proceeding.
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat
tire repair. Have the tire inspected and
repaired or replaced after using the Tire
Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you. Have the tire checked
as soon as possible at an authorized dealer.
7
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Place the transmission in PARK (P) and cycle
the ignition in the OFF position.
Apply the parking brake.
NOTE:
If tire has improper inflation follow the steps
below
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove
the cap from the fitting at the end of the
hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on
the ground next to the deflated
tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and
then screw the fitting at the end of the
Sealant Hose onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and
insert the plug into the vehicle's
12 Volt power outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the
fitting at the end of the hose onto
the valve stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and
turn to the Air Mode position.
7.Check the pressure in the tire by
reading the Pressure Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn
on Tire Service Kit and inflate the
tire to the cold tire inflation
pressure found on the tire and
loading information label located in the
driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the
recommended inflation pressure before
continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve
stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper
storage area in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced at the earliest opportunity at an
authorized dealer or tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
steering wheel after the tire has been
repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has
been sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 339
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
Hose Location
3. Remove the bottle cover.
Remove The Bottle Cover
4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to
release.
Rotate The Bottle Up
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
Remove The Bottle
NOTE:
For sealant bottle installation, follow these
steps reverse order.
Replacement sealant bottles are available at
authorized service centers.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly so please follow
the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
7
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left
side of the engine compartment.
Battery Location
NOTE:
The positive battery post may be covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access
to the positive battery post. Do not jump off
fuses. Only jump directly off positive post which
has a positive (+) symbol on or around the post.
Battery Post Locations
See below steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the
automatic transmission into PARK (P) and
place the ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective
cover over the remote positive (+) battery
post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, set the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 341
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive (+)
post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post
near the windshield cowl (exposed metallic/
unpainted post of the discharge vehicle).
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the
disconnecting procedure below.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the
jumper cable from the remote negative
post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system inspected at an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
7
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel
for a Cap-Less Fuel System. If refueling is
necessary, while using an approved gas can,
insert the refueling funnel into the filler neck
opening. Take care to open both flappers with
the funnel to avoid spills
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly
push on the fuel door to break the ice buildup
and re-release the fuel door using the inside
release button. Do not pry on the door.
Refueling Funnel
Inserting Funnel
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors.
A funnel is provided to allow emergency
refueling with a gas can.
See below steps for refueling :
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening
as the fuel nozzle.
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold
flapper doors open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off
prior to putting back in the spare tire
storage area.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 343
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
On the highway — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase
engine idle speed.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge
reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off
until the pointer drops back into the normal
range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn
the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
WARNING!
You should be seated in the driver’s seat with
your foot firmly placed on the brake pedal to
maintain control of the vehicle before
activating the Manual Park Release. If
possible, you should apply the parking brake.
Activating the Manual Park Release will allow
your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured or
properly connected to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury
or death for those in or around the vehicle.
7
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
To move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such
as a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release
is available.
Manual Park Release Access Cover
Follow These Steps To Activate The Manual
Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal
while seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake, if possible.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the Manual Park Release access
cover, which is to the lower left of the
steering column.
4. The Manual Park Release access cover is
connected to a red tether strap. Pull the
tether strap out as far as it will go, then
release it. The transmission should now be
in NEUTRAL (N), allowing the vehicle to be
moved.
Tether Strap
NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the released posi-
tion, the tether will remain outside of the trim
panel and the access cover cannot be rein-
stalled.
5. Release the parking brake only when the
vehicle is securely connected to a tow
vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal
while seated in the driver’s seat.
2.
Pull the tether strap out again, then release
it.
3.
Allow the tether to retract with the lever
back to its original position.
4.
Verify that the transmission is in PARK (P).
5.
Confirm that the tether has retracted fully
and re-install the access cover. If the access
cover cannot be re-installed, repeat steps
1 through 4.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Then
shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the
accelerator.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 345
(Continued)
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
less. Whenever the transmission remains in
NEUTRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you
must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or
REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion
without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF switch to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial Off”
mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 257.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC
OFF switch again to restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h),
or drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
CAUTION! (Continued)
7
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground FWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance
NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front
NOT RECOMMENDED (but, if used,
same limitations as above)
NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT RECOMMENDED
NOT RECOMMENDED, but, if used:
Ignition in ON/RUN mode
Transmission in NEUTRAL
(NOT in PARK)
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 347
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
fascia/bumper or associated brackets. State
and local laws regarding vehicles under tow
must be observed.
NOTE:
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
feature is disabled before towing this vehicle
(if rear wheels are on the ground), to avoid
inadvertent Electric Park Brake (EPB)
engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is
enabled or disabled via the customer
programmable features in the Uconnect
Settings.
Vehicles with a discharged battery or total
electrical failure when the (EPB) is engaged,
will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the
rear wheels off the ground when moving the
vehicle onto a flatbed.
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle
with all four wheels OFF the ground using a
flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this
vehicle must be towed with the front wheels
OFF the ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel
lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
NOTE:
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed.
Vehicle Recovery Tow Points
Your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Recovery
Points that can be used to recover a disabled
vehicle, located on the underbody of the
vehicle.
NOTE:
Ensure that the towing service tow hooks are
properly seated and secured in the attach-
ment points.
This recovery tow feature should be used by
a trained professional only.
Use approved receptacle location to free the
disabled vehicle from its environment.
Front Recovery Points
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
7
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC
mode.
NOTE:
The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park
Brake whenever the driver's door is opened (if the
ignition is ON, transmission is not in PARK, and
brake pedal is released). If you are towing this
vehicle with the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you
must manually disable the Electric Park Brake
each time the driver's door is opened, by pressing
the brake pedal and then releasing the EPB.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, detailed instructions on
shifting the transmission out of PARK in order to
move the vehicle Ú page 343.
CAUTION!
Recovery feature:
Is to be used by a professional ONLY.
Is used only to provide recovery of the
vehicle.
Is NOT to be used to recover secondary
vehicle.
Is NOT to be used for transporting the
vehicle over the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
Is to be used by a professional ONLY.
Is used only to provide recovery of the
vehicle.
Is NOT to be used to recover secondary
vehicle.
Is NOT to be used for transporting the
vehicle over the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
Recovery load should:
Be applied at constant speed.
Be applied parallel to the center line of the
length of the vehicle.
Not be an abrupt acceleration.
Be applied at constant speed.
Be applied parallel to the center line of the
length of the vehicle.
Not be an abrupt acceleration.
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not use sling-type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while
being towed.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 349
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle
with all four wheels OFF the ground using a
flatbed.
If the transmission and driveline are operable,
AWD models can also be towed with the ignition
in the ON/RUN mode, the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N) (not in PARK!), and the rear
wheels OFF the ground with no limitation on
speed or distance. Since the ignition MUST be in
the ON/RUN mode to tow in this manner, AWD
vehicles must be towed with ALL FOUR wheels
OFF the ground (e.g. on a flatbed truck) if the
key fob is unavailable.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact. Detailed
information can be found on Ú page 298.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle. Detailed information can be found on
Ú page 300.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle using any other method
can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
7
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the
“Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change
is performed by someone other than an
authorized dealer Ú page 121.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check tire pressure and look for unusual
wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign
of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the
oil indicator system turns on
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir
and brake master cylinder, fill as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior
lights
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 351
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plans for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
Inspect the CV/Universal joints
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
Inspect exhaust system
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. If required, replace engine air cleaner filter
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends, and
replace if necessary
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive tensioner, idler pulley, and
replace if necessary
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs
1
X
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 353
Replace the front accessory drive belt X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first
X X
Replace PCV valve X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Battery
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 8 — Windshield Washer Reservoir Cap
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 355
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
every fuel stop. The best time to check the
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the
low end of the range and MAX at the high end
of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at
the MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
hatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liter) of oil when the reading
is at the low end of the dipstick range will raise
the oil level to the high end of the range
marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
Windshield Washer Fluid Cap
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the
engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals.
Fill the reservoir with windshield washer
solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate
the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual washer fluid.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid, apply it to a cloth or towel,
and wipe clean the wiper blades; this will help
blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling
or working around the washer solution.
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE -FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
maintenance-free battery. You will never have
to add water, and periodic maintenance is not
required.
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result
in civil penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water Ú page 339.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 357
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils
that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of the manufacturer Material
Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends API
Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against the addition of any additives (other than
leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil
is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
an authorized dealer, service station or
governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely
discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be
used for replacement. The quality of replacement
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
Mopar® certified filters should be used.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 351.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.)
unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near
the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so
can result in serious personal injury.
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified
filters should be used.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across the ribbed surface of a
belt from rib to rib, are considered normal.
These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across)
are not normal. Any belt with cracks running
along a rib must be replaced. Also, have the belt
replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords,
or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa-
rated from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken
NOTE:
Identify and correct problem before new belt is
installed
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or
rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in
operation).
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools; we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air
conditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory
drive belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could
be injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a compe-
tent mechanic.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 359
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. It is recommended
that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove all contents from the glove
compartment.
Glove Compartment
2. Open the glove compartment door partially,
leaving extra slack on the glove
compartment tension tether. Detach the
glove compartment tension tether by sliding
the black tension tether clip down, and
popping it out of the slot on the side of the
glove compartment door.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for
your air conditioning system. Some unap-
proved refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to Warranty Information located
online, for further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air
filter removed and the blower operating, the
blower can contact hands and may propel dirt
and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether Clip
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. There are glove compartment travel stops
on either side of the glove compartment
door. To release them, push inward on each
travel stop, and pull the glove compartment
door down until the travel stops pass clear
of their hooking points.
4. Open the glove compartment door as far as
possible to gain access to the cabin air filter
compartment cover.
Cabin Air Filter Compartment Cover
5. Pry up the lid of each individual
compartment snap, and detach it from the
rest of the snap. There is a small space on
the side of each snap to use for separating
the lid from the snap. Once detached,
remove the rest of the snap completely from
the compartment cover.
6. After removing the snaps, lift up the
compartment cover to gain access to the
fresh air inlet.
Fresh Air Inlet
7. Remove the filter cover by prying back each
of the retaining tabs from their hooking
points, and then pulling the filter cover out
to expose the cabin air filter. Remove the air
filter by pulling it straight out of the housing.
8. Install the new air filter with the arrow on the
filter pointing toward the floor.
9. Once the filter is replaced, reinstall the filter
cover, making sure the retaining tabs are
fully secured into their housings.
10. Close the cabin air filter compartment
cover, and reinsert the snaps into their
slots. Push the snap lids until fully attached.
11. Push the glove compartment door to the
near closed position to reengage the glove
compartment travel stops. Finally, pull the
glove compartment tension tether clip down
and slide it back into the slot on the side of
the glove compartment door.
1 — Compartment Cover
2 — Compartment Snap
1 — Filter Cover
2 — Retaining Tabs
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result
in the need to replace it more often.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 361
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically. Use a lithium-based grease, such
as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess
oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch release mechanism, and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
lubricant, such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder
Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies
depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. If chattering, marks, water lines or wet
spots are present, clean the wiper blades or
replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a
new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm
or blade that is damaged.
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the
full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the release tab on the wiper
blade and while holding the wiper arm with
one hand, slide the wiper blade down
towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the
wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding
the wiper arm with one hand and separating
the wiper blade from the wiper arm with the
other hand (move the wiper blade toward the
right side of the vehicle to separate the wiper
blade from the wiper arm).
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 363
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on
the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper
release tab open and the blade side of the
wiper facing up and away from the
windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through
the opening in the wiper blade under the
release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
the wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade
until it is flush against the wiper arm. Fold
down the latch release tab and snap it into
its locked position. Latch engagement will
be accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is
unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the
rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper
arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, grasp the bottom end of the wiper
blade nearest to wiper arm with your right
hand. With your left hand hold the wiper arm
as you pull the wiper blade away from the
wiper arm past its stop far enough to
unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the
receptacle on the end of the wiper arm.
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper
blade, move the wiper blade upward and
away from the wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto
the glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is
unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the
rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper
arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab
the bottom end of the wiper arm with one
hand, and press the wiper blade flush with
the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and
snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into
place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or
oil change. Replace as required.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
4 — Wiper Arm
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 365
(Continued)
Under normal operating conditions, the
catalytic converter will not require
maintenance. However, it is important to keep
the engine properly tuned to ensure proper
catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching
odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to FCA US LLC
specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-
mission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition
components disconnected or removed, such
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you Ú page 318.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn, such as
grass or leaves, and those items can come
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
operating condition. In the event of engine
malfunction, particularly involving engine
misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze)
protection every 12 months (before the onset of
freezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine coolant is dirty, the system should be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming
to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check
the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean
by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and
tightness of the connection at the coolant
recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING
SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 351.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 410.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protec-
tion. OAT engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or
any “globally compatible” coolant. If a
non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
open a cooling system pressure cap when the
radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 367
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant.
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant
is not recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for
using OAT engine coolant that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an
authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant solution. The use of lower
quality water will reduce the amount of corro-
sion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact an authorized
dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed
in an emergency, have an authorized dealer
drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant will return to the radiator
from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery
tank (if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
is a regulated substance requiring proper
disposal. Check with your local authorities to
determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain
in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills
immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick
visual method for determining that the coolant
level is adequate. With the engine off and cold,
the level of the coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle
should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines
marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be
checked once a month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain
the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
See an authorized dealer for service.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of
the coolant expansion bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build-up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 369
(Continued)
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which
contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-
factory engine cooling performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically. For the proper
maintenance intervals Ú page 351.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be
checked when performing under hood services
or immediately if the “Brake Warning Light” is
illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder
area before removing the cap. If necessary, add
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the
requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake
fluid level should be checked when pads are
replaced. However, low fluid level may be
caused by a leak and a checkup may be
needed.
Use only manufacturer recommended brake
fluid Ú page 412.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer recommended brake
fluid
Ú
page 412. Using the wrong type of
brake fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid
that has been in a tightly closed container.
Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap
secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open
container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or
prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against using any special additives in the
transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid
(ATF) is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid
additives to the transmission. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission
performance and life. Use only the
manufacturer specified transmission fluid
Ú page 412. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 371
(Continued)
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
Blade Fuses
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality
and/or torque converter shudder
Ú page 412.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse
element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional
fuse element (blown fuse)
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371
372 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fuse Location
The fuses are grouped into a controller located
in the engine compartment.
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located
in the engine compartment near the battery.
This center contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses,
micro-fuses, circuit breakers and relays. A label
that identifies each component is printed on the
inside of the cover.
Before any procedure is done on the PDC, make
sure engine is turned off.
Remove the cover by unlatching the two locks
located at each side of the PDC cover, avoid the
usage of screw drivers or any other tool to
remove the cover, since they may apply
excessive force and result in a broken/
damaged part.
After service is done, secure the cover with its
two locks.
Power Distribution Center
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F06 – – Not Used
F07 – 25 Amp Clear Ignition Coil/Fuel Injector
F08 – – Not Used
F09 – 25 Amp Clear
Amplifier/Active Noise Control — If
Equipped
F10 – – Not Used
F11 – – Not Used
F12 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor (IBS)
F13 – 10 Amp Red ECM (ESS Only)
F14 – 10 Amp Red ECM
F15 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #3 (Power Locks)
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 373
F16 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM
F17 30 Amp Pink – Starter
F18 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #4 (Exterior Lighting #1)
F19 25 Amp Clear –
2nd Row Folding Seats Solenoid LT
— If Equipped
F20 – 10 Amp Red A/C Compressor Clutch
F21 25 Amp Clear –
2nd Row Folding Seat Solenoid RT
— If Equipped
F22 – – Not Used
F23 – – Not used
F24 – 20 Amp Yellow RR Wiper
F25A – 10 Amp Red
Handsfree LT & RT RR Door
Release Mod — If Equipped
F25B – 10 Amp Red
Active Grill Shutter/ PWR Mirror — If
Equipped
F26 40 Amp Green – Front HVAC Blower Motor
F27 25 Amp Clear –
RR Slide Door Module-RT — If
Equipped
F28A – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Report
F28B – 10 Amp Red USB + AUX Port / Video USB Port
F29 – – Not Used
F30A – 15 Amp Blue Media HUB 1&2 — If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373
374 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F30B – 15 Amp Blue PWR Lumbar SW — If Equipped
F31 – – Not Used
F32 20 Amp Blue – ECM
F33 30 Amp Pink –
Power Liftgate Module — If
Equipped
F34 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Module-LT — If Equipped
F35 25 Amp Clear –
Sunroof Control Module — If
Equipped
F36 – – Not Used
F37 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #4 (Exterior Lighting #2)
F38 60 Amp Yellow – Vacuum Cleaner — If Equipped
F39 25 Amp Clear – Rear HVAC Blower Motor
F40 – – Not Used
F41 – – Not Used
F42 40 Amp Green – Folding Seat Module — If Equipped
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F44 30 Amp Pink – CBC Feed #1 (Interior Lights)
F45 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter — If Equipped
F46 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F47 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F48 – – Not Used
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 375
F49 25 Amp Clear –
RR Sliding Door Module-LT — If
Equipped
F50 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Module-RT — If Equipped
F51 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F52 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump
F53 – – Not Used
F54 40 Amp Green – ESP-ECU And Valves
F55A – 15 Amp Blue
Radio Frequency HUB/ Keyless
Ignition System (KIN) / (Electronic
Steering Lock-BUX ONLY) — If
Equipped
F55B – 15 Amp Blue
DVD / Video Routing Module (VRM)
— If Equipped
F56A – 10 Amp Red
Front and Rear HVAC Control
Module / Occupant Classification
Module (OCM)/Electronic Steering
Lock (ESL)
F56B – 10 Amp Red ESP/ESC
F57 – – Not Used
F58 – 10 Amp Red
Drive Train Control Mod / Power
Transfer Unit — If Equipped
F59 30 Amp Pink –
Trailer Tow Receptacle — If
Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375
376 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F60 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Cargo APO
F61 – 20 Amp Yellow
Trailer Tow Right Stop/Turn — If
Equipped
F62 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Transfer Unit — If Equipped
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow
Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn — If
Equipped
F64 – 15 Amp Blue RT HID Headlamp — If Equipped
F65 – – Not Used
F66 – 15 Amp Blue
Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/
SGW
F67 – 10 Amp Red
Haptic Lane Feedback Module
(HALF) / Parktronics System (PTS)/
Drivers Assist System Module
(DASM)
F68 – – Not Used
F69 – – Not Used
F70 – – Not Used
F71 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F72 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors – If Equipped
F73 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL)
F74 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup — If Equipped
F75 – 5 Amp Tan Overhead Console / RR ISC
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 377
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow Uconnect/DCSD/Telematics
F77A – 10 Amp Red
RR Entertainment Screen 1 & 2/
Media HUB 1 & 2/3rd Row USB
Charge Only/2nd Row USB Charge
Only/Vacuum Cleaner SW/3rd Row
Recline ST SW/LT & RT Stow N Go
SW/LT & RT Sliding Door SW
Backlight
F77B – 10 Amp Red Rain Sensor/Sunroof /CRVMM
F78A – 15 Amp Blue
Transmission Control Module
(TCM)/ E-Shifter
F78B – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster
F79 – 10 Amp Red
ICS/Front And Rear HVAC/ SCCM/
EPB
F80 – – Not Used
F81 – – Not Used
F82 – – Not Used
F83
20 Amp Blue – TT Park Lights — If Equipped
30 Amp Pink –
Headlamp Washer Pump — If
Equipped
F84 30 Amp Pink –
Drive Train Control MOD — If
Equipped
F85 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 377
378 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F86 – – Not Used
F87 – – Not Used
F88 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
F89 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
F90 – – Not Used
F91 – 15 Amp Blue
Front Ventilated Seats/Heated
Steering Wheel — If Equipped
F92 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F93 – – Not Used
F94 40 Amp Green – ESC Motor Pump
F95A – 10 Amp Red USB Charge Port — ACC RUN
F95B – 10 Amp Red
Selectable Fuse Location – USB IP
(Direct) B+
F96 – 10 Amp Red
Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) (Airbag)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 378
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 379
* 30 Amp mini fuse is substituted for 25 Amp Circuit Breaker.
F97 – 10 Amp Red
Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) (Airbag)
F98 – 15 Amp Blue Left HID Headlamp — If Equipped
F99 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Module - If Equipped
F100A – 10 Amp Red AHLM — If Equipped
F100B – 10 Amp Red
Rear Camera/LBSS/RBSS/CVPM/
Humidity Sensor/In Vehicle
Temperature Sensor — If Equipped
Circuit Breakers
CB1 25 Amp Power Seats (Driver)
CB2 25 Amp * Power Seats (Pass)
CB3 25 Amp
FRT PWR Window W/O Door Nodes
+ RR PWR Window Lockout
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 379
380 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. For replacement of LED lamps, see an authorized dealer.
Interior Bulbs — Halogen
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. For replacement of LED lamps, see an authorized dealer.
Exterior Bulbs — Halogen
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Visor Vanity Lamps 6501966
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Turn Signal Lamp WY21W
Front Side Marker Lamp W3W
Rear Side Marker Lamp W3W
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 380
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 381
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Front Turn Signal Lamp
See below steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Twist the front turn signal lamp socket
assembly counterclockwise, and then
remove the front turn signal lamp assembly
from the lamp housing.
Front Turn Signal Lamp Socket
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the
replacement bulb.
4. Install the front turn signal lamp socket
assembly into the housing, and rotate the
front turn signal lamp socket clockwise to
lock it in place.
Front And Rear Side Marker Lamps
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove the three fasteners from the inner
wheel liner and carefully peel back liner for
access.
Inner Wheel Liner Fasteners
2. Firmly grab the front side marker lamp
socket and rotate a quarter turn counter-
clockwise to remove it from the lamp
assembly.
Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Removal
3. Remove bulb from the front side marker
lamp socket and replace with a new bulb.
4. Install front side marker lamp socket in
lamp assembly and rotate a quarter turn
clockwise to lock into place.
5. Position the inner wheel liner in place and
install the three fasteners.
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 381
382 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 382
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 383
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 383
384 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 384
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 385
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN,
including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the
vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 385
386 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
The manufacturer recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 386
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 387
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in this manual
Ú page 195.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing, Ú page 195.
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lb.
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 387
388 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lb.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table
is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry
capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 388
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 389
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping
distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload
them.
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 389
390 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a
comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a
jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgment when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve
stem.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 390
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 391
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build-up or your tire
pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is
very important. Increased tire pressure and
reduced vehicle loading may be required for
high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an
authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
as well as it is not designed to be reused.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision.
Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 391
392 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a Run Flat tire is changed
after driving with underinflated tire condition,
please replace the TPM sensor as it is not
designed to be reused when driven under run
flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode Ú page 270.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced Ú page 393.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not
let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 392
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 393
(Continued)
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed
Ú page 392. The Load Index and Speed Symbol
for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the
Tire Safety Information section of this manual
for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 383.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 393
394 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer
and odometer readings.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too
fast for conditions also creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 394
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 395
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire Ú page 333.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 203.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to
the original equipment tire and wheel found on
the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare
tire may be used in the tire rotation for your
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to
an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original equipment tire should be repaired (or
replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at
the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to
mount a conventional tire on the compact
spare wheel, since the wheel is designed
specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not
install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use
temporary spare installed. Damage to the
vehicle may result.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 395
8
396 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary
emergency use only. You can identify if your
vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump
before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically
for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel.
This label contains the driving limitations for
this spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it
is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 396
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 397
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar®
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from
the brake components. This activity will remove
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 397
398 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
the following snow traction devices are
recommended. Follow these recommendations
to guard against damage:
Snow traction device must be of proper size
for the tire, as recommended by the snow
traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use
with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table below for the recom-
mended tire size, axle and snow traction
device:
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.
They will permanently damage this finish and
such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that
is required to maintain this finish.
FWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond
tire profile or equivalent)
Touring
Touring L
Touring L Plus
Front
235/65R17
235/60R18
9 mm Cable/Chain
Limited 235/60R18
Pinnacle
235/60R18
18 x 7.5 x 50.8 mm
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 398
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 399
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
AWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond
tire profile or equivalent)
Touring
Touring L
Touring L Plus
Front
235/60R18
9 mm Cable/Chain
Limited
Pinnacle
235/60R18
18 x 7.5 x 50.8 mm
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose
control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only trac-
tion devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage.
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device
before further use.
CAUTION! (Continued)
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not
require retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
CAUTION! (Continued)
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 399
400 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed Ú page 350.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some
directional tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 400
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 401
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than
three weeks, we recommend that you take the
following steps to minimize the drain on your
vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out
of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air conditioning system at idle
for about five minutes in the fresh air and
high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 401
402 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
Stone and gravel impact
Insects, tree sap and tar
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive
material to clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar® Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Use
precautions to not scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 402
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 403
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a
soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
8
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 403
404 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl
upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used,
wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a
soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically
recommended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and should
be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft
cloth and Mopar® Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery
with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and the manufac-
turer recommends Mopar® total care leather
cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather
seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or
any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated
surfaces of the interior may cause perma-
nent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather seats, as damage to the seat may
result.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 404
405
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on
the left front corner of the instrument panel and
is visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will be
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You
may notice increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the Brake
Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(i.e., repeated brake applications with the
engine off) the brakes will still function.
However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended
lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or
oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 Ft-Lb
(135 N·m)
M12 x 1.5 19 mm
9
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 405
406 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
bolt (do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly tightened.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and
may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
optimum fuel economy and
performance when using high quality
unleaded “Regular” gasoline having a posted
octane number of 87 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane
“Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will not
provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in
these engines.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated
gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle
emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is
recommended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 406
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 407
GASOLINE /OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on
Poor engine performance
Poor cold start and cold drivability
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) I N
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The
manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the
gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and
California reformulated gasoline.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains
greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
9
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 407
408 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
control system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent
burning odor or some light smoke, your
engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning
and may require immediate service. Contact
an authorized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
bility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 408
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 409
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine 19 Gallons 71 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine
13.1 Quarts — Standard Duty Cooling
13.4 Quarts — Heavy Duty Cooling
12.4 Liters — Standard Duty Cooling
12.7 Liters — Heavy Duty Cooling
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
9
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 409
410 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
or equivalent meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Material
Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395 such as
Mopar®, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine
Oil Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/
USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol (Do not use E-85).
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 410
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 411
(Continued)
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust
products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
CAUTION! (Continued)
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
CAUTION! (Continued)
9
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 411
412 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend you use Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should
be used.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 412
413
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with
the service manager. Keep a maintenance log
of your vehicle's service history. This can often
provide a clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
(additional charges may apply). If you need a
rental, it is advisable to make these
arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to
be happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an
authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that
you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have
the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
10
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 413
414 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer’s service manager first. If for
some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to
the general manager or owner of the authorized
dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to
resolve the concern, you may contact the FCA
US LLC's Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC C USTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247-9753
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US
V
IRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 247-9753
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing
difficulties, FCA US LLC has installed special
TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing
or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
in the United States, can communicate with FCA
US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 414
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 415
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after the FCA US LLC's
New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The
Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY
vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar® Vehicle
Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service
contract, call the FCA US LLC's Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om for further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
owners.mopar.ca/en/ for further information.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts &
accessories and factory filled fluids are
available from an authorized dealer. They are
recommended for your vehicle to keep it
operating at its best and maintain its original
condition.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
10
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 415
416 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON , D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
a complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These manuals make it easy to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle
systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all
tools and equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or
Diagnostic Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 416
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 417
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA
vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through
Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
10
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 417
418
INDEX
WARRANTY INFORMATION ......................415
A
About Your Brakes
.........................................405
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control)
.................................... 163 , 165
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............367
Additives, Fuel ...............................................408
Adjust
Down ........................................................... 50
Forward ....................................................... 50
Rearward..................................................... 50
Up................................................................ 50
Air Bag ...........................................................288
Air Bag Operation ......................................289
Air Bag Warning Light ...................... 287 , 290
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................294
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 298, 349
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...................... 349
Front Air Bag ............................................. 290
If Deployment Occurs ............................... 297
Knee Impact Bolsters ............................... 294
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............. 299
Maintenance ............................................ 299
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............. 287
Side Air Bags ............................................ 294
Transporting Pets ..................................... 318
Air Bag Light................................134 , 287, 318
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ...357
Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 358
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 358 , 359
Air Conditioner System ................................. 358
Air Conditioning Filter ..............................88 , 359
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................88
Air Filter ........................................................ 357
Air Pressure
Tires ......................................................... 390
Alarm
Arm The System
...........................................23
Disarm The System ......................................23
Security Alarm .......................................... 137
All Wheel Drive
Towing ...................................................... 349
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ................................... 160
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle
.........................................................10
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................. 366 , 409
Disposal .................................................... 368
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ....................... 255
Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 137
Ashtray .............................................................98
Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 260
Audio Jack ........................................................94
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 209
Auto Up Power Windows ..................................99
Automatic Dimming Mirror ...............................60
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 418
419
Automatic Headlights
...................................... 69
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ............. 87
Automatic Transaxle ......................................154
Automatic Transmission ................................156
Adding Fluid .................................... 370 , 412
Fluid And Filter Change .............................370
Fluid Change .............................................370
Fluid Level Check ......................................370
Fluid Type ........................................ 370 , 412
Special Additives .......................................370
AutoPark ........................................................146
AUX Cord.......................................................... 94
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet
(Power Outlet) .................................................. 96
AWD
Towing
.......................................................349
Axle Lubrication .............................................412
B
Back-Up Camera
............................................190
Battery ................................................. 135 , 356
Charging System Light ...............................135
Jump Starting ............................................339
Keyless Key Fob Replacement .................... 16
Battery Saver Feature ...................................... 71
Belts, Seat .................................................... 318
Blind Spot Monitoring ................................... 262
Body Mechanism Lubrication ....................... 361
B-Pillar Location ............................................ 386
Brake Assist System ..................................... 256
Brake Control System, Electronic .................. 256
Brake Fluid ................................................... 412
Brake System ...................................... 369 , 405
Anti-Lock (ABS) ......................................... 405
Fluid Check ...................................... 369 , 412
Master Cylinder ........................................ 369
Parking ..................................................... 151
Warning Light ........................................... 134
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...................... 155
Brightness, Interior Lights ................................72
Bulb Replacement ............................... 380 , 381
Bulbs, Light ................................. 320 , 380, 381
C
Camera
......................................................... 190
Camera, Rear ....................................... 190 , 191
Capacities, Fluid ........................................... 409
Caps, Filler
Fuel
.......................................................... 195
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 354
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..................... 368
Car Washes ................................................... 402
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............................ 320
Cargo
Vehicle Loading ........................................ 107
Cargo Area Cover .......................................... 107
Cargo Compartment
Luggage Carrier ........................................ 113
Cargo Load Floor ........................................... 107
Cargo Tie-Downs ........................................... 107
Cellular Phone ............................................... 254
Certification Label ......................................... 195
Chains, Tire ................................................... 398
Change Oil Indicator ...................................... 122
Changing A Flat Tire ...................................... 325
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 383
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) ......................... 143
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety .................. 318
Checks, Safety .............................................. 318
Child Restraint .............................................. 300
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ........................................... 303
Center Seat LATCH ................................... 310
Child Seat Installation ......................312 , 314
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ..... 311
11
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 419
420
Infant And Child Restraints
.......................302
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ..304
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........302
Seating Positions ......................................304
Using The Top Tether Anchorage ...............315
Cigar Lighter .................................................... 98
Clean Air Gasoline .........................................406
Cleaning
Wheels ......................................................397
Climate Control ................................................ 75
Automatic .................................................... 75
Manual ........................................................ 81
Rear ..................................................... 80 , 86
Coat Hook ........................................................92
Cold Weather Operation ................................149
Compact Spare Tire .......................................395
Computer, Trip/Travel ...................................133
Contract, Service ...........................................415
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .............368
Cooling System ..............................................366
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .......................367
Coolant Level ............................................368
Cooling Capacity ........................................409
Disposal Of Used Coolant ..........................368
Drain, Flush, And Refill ..............................366
Inspection........................................ 366 , 368
Points To Remember ................................ 368
Pressure Cap ............................................ 368
Radiator Cap ............................................ 368
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze)
.........................366 , 409, 410
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 402
Cruise Control ............................................... 163
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ..................... 165
Cruise Light .......................................... 141 , 142
Customer Assistance .................................... 413
Cybersecurity ................................................ 209
D
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights
..................72
Daytime Running Lights ...................................68
Dealer Service .............................................. 356
Defroster, Windshield ................................... 318
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ..............................73
Diagnostic System, Onboard ......................... 142
Dimmer Switch
Headlight
.....................................................68
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine)
............................................... 355
Disable Vehicle Towing ................................. 346
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................... 368
Door Ajar ..............................................135 , 136
Door Ajar Light ..................................... 135 , 136
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ......................................35
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or
Shallow Standing Water
....................... 207
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) .... 234
E
Electric Brake Control System
....................... 256
Anti-Lock Brake System ............................ 255
Traction Control System ............................ 261
Electric Parking Brake ................................... 151
Electric Remote Mirrors ...................................62
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ................... 257
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ...... 136
Emergency Braking ....................................... 269
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 321
Jacking.............................................325 , 327
Jump Starting ........................................... 339
Overheating .............................................. 343
Towing ...................................................... 346
Emission Control System Maintenance ......... 143
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 420
421
Engine
...........................................................354
Air Cleaner.................................................357
Block Heater .............................................150
Break-In Recommendations ......................150
Checking Oil Level .....................................355
Compartment ............................................354
Compartment Identification ......................354
Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................................410
Cooling ......................................................366
Exhaust Gas Caution .................................320
Fails To Start .............................................149
Flooded, Starting .......................................149
Fuel Requirements ....................................406
Oil........................................... 357 , 409, 410
Oil Filler Cap ..............................................354
Oil Filter .....................................................357
Oil Selection .................................... 357 , 409
Oil Synthetic ..............................................357
Overheating ...............................................343
Starting .....................................................145
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .. 298 , 349
Ethanol ..........................................................407
Exhaust Gas Cautions ....................................320
Exhaust System ................................... 320 , 364
Exterior Lighting ......................................68 , 381
Exterior Lights ...................... 68 , 320, 380, 381
F
Filters
Air Cleaner
................................................ 357
Air Conditioning ..................................88 , 359
Engine Oil ........................................ 357 , 410
Engine Oil Disposal ................................... 357
Flashers
Hazard Warning
........................................ 321
Turn Signals .................... 68 , 141, 320, 381
Flash-To-Pass ............................................68 , 69
Flat Tire Changing .......................325 , 382, 395
Flat Tire Stowage ........................ 333 , 382, 395
Flooded Engine Starting ................................ 149
Fluid Capacities ............................................ 409
Fluid Leaks ................................................... 320
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ........................................................ 369
Engine Oil ................................................. 355
Fluid, Brake .................................................. 412
Fog Lights .................................................68 , 70
Fold In Floor (Stow ‘n Go) Seating ....................45
Fold-Flat Seats .................................................35
Forward Collision Warning ............................ 267
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................................ 344
Front Position Light ....................................... 381
Fuel ............................................................... 406
Additives ................................................... 408
Clean Air ................................................... 406
Ethanol ..................................................... 407
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................................. 195
Gasoline ................................................... 406
Materials Added ....................................... 408
Methanol .................................................. 407
Octane Rating .................................. 406 , 410
Requirements ........................................... 406
Specifications ........................................... 410
Tank Capacity ........................................... 409
Fuses ............................................................ 371
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....................64
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............................... 195
Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................................. 406
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................ 406
Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 406
Gear Ranges ................................................. 156
Glass Cleaning .............................................. 404
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 197
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 197
GVWR ............................................................ 196
11
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 421
422
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising,
Or Shallow Standing Water
...................207
Hazard Warning Flashers ..............................321
Head Restraints ............................................... 55
Headlights ....................................................... 68
Cleaning ....................................................402
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .......... 68
Lights On Reminder .............................. 68 , 70
Passing................................................. 68 , 69
Switch ......................................................... 68
Time Delay .................................................. 68
Washers ...................................................... 70
Heated Mirrors ......................................... 60 , 63
Heated Seats ................................................... 54
Heater, Engine Block .....................................150
Hill Start Assist ..............................................260
Hitches
Trailer Towing
............................................199
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .................... 64
Hood Prop......................................................102
Hood Release ................................................102
Hook, Coat ....................................................... 92
I
Ignition.............................................................18
Switch..........................................................18
Inside Rearview Mirror ............................60 , 321
Instrument Cluster ........................................ 120
Display...................................................... 121
Menu Items .............................................. 125
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 404
Interior And Instrument Lights .........................71
Interior Appearance Care .............................. 403
Interior Lights ...................................................71
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................73
Inverter
Power ..........................................................97
J
Jack Location
................................................ 326
Jack Operation .............................................. 325
Jump Starting ............................................... 339
K
Key Fob
............................................................14
Arm The System ..........................................23
Disarm The Alarm ........................................23
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............17
Key Fob Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................................16
Key Fob Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................................17
Keyless Enter-N-Go ..........................................26
Passive Entry ...............................................26
Keys .................................................................14
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals ........................68
Lane Change Assist ...................................68 , 71
LaneSense .................................................... 187
Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................................... 276
Latches ......................................................... 320
Hood ......................................................... 102
Lead Free Gasoline ....................................... 406
Leaks, Fluid ................................................... 320
Life Of Tires ................................................... 393
Liftgate.......................................................... 103
Power........................................................ 104
Light Bulbs ........................................... 320 , 381
Lighter
Cigar ............................................................98
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 422
423
Lights
.............................................................320
Air Bag.................................... 134 , 287, 318
Anti Lock Brake System .............................137
Automatic Emergency Braking OFF ...........141
Battery Saver............................................... 71
Brake Assist Warning ................................259
Brake Warning ..........................................134
Bulb Replacement ........................... 380 , 381
Cruise .............................................. 141 , 142
Daytime Running .........................................68
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ........................... 68
Electric Power Steering Fault ....................135
Electronic Park Brake ................................137
Electronic Stability Control Active ..............138
Electronic Throttle Control .........................136
Engine Coolant Temperature .....................136
Exterior ............................................ 320 , 381
Fog .....................................................70 , 141
Headlights ............................................ 68 , 69
High Beam ................................................142
High Beam/Low Beam Select ..................... 68
Hood Open ................................................136
Instrument Cluster ...................................... 68
Intensity Control .......................................... 72
Interior ........................................................ 71
KeySense ..................................................141
LaneSense .............................138 , 141, 142
Liftgate Open ............................................ 136
Lights On Reminder .............................. 68 , 70
Low Fuel ................................................... 138
Low Washer Fluid ..................................... 138
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ....... 138
Oil Pressure .............................................. 137
Oil Temperature ........................................ 137
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) .............72
Park .......................................................... 141
Passing .................................................68 , 69
Reading .......................................................71
Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 136
Security Alarm .......................................... 137
Service ..................................................... 380
Service Automatic Emergency Braking ..... 139
Service AWD ............................................. 139
Service LaneSense ................................... 138
Service Stop Start System ........................ 139
Side Marker .............................................. 381
SmartBeams ...............................................69
Stop Start Active ....................................... 141
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .............. 139
Traction Control ........................................ 259
Transmission Temperature ....................... 137
Turn Signals .................... 68 , 141, 320, 381
Load Floor, Cargo .......................................... 107
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode ..................... 132
Load Shed Battery Saver On ......................... 132
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ........... 132
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............ 132
Loading Vehicle .................................... 107 , 195
Tires.......................................................... 386
Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 270
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 361
Lug Nuts........................................................ 405
Luggage Carrier ............................................. 113
M
Maintenance ................................................. 102
Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 356
Maintenance Schedule ................................. 350
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine)
....................................... 138 , 143
Manual
Park Release
............................................ 343
Service...................................................... 416
Map/Reading Lights ........................................71
Marker Lights, Side ....................................... 381
Media Hub .......................................................94
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) .....................35
Memory Seat ......................................33 , 35, 62
11
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 423
424
Memory Seats And Radio
................................ 35
Methanol .......................................................407
Mini-Trip Computer ........................................133
Mirrors ............................................................. 60
Automatic Dimming ..................................... 60
Electric Remote ........................................... 62
Exterior Folding ........................................... 62
Heated ................................................. 60 , 63
Memory ....................................................... 33
Outside................................................. 60 , 61
Rearview ............................................60 , 321
Vanity .......................................................... 61
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle ........................................................ 10
Monitor, Tire Pressure System .......................270
Mopar Parts ...................................................415
MP3 Control .................................................... 94
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................ 68
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..........................150
O
Occupant Restraints ......................................274
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 406 , 410
Oil Change Indicator ......................................122
Reset.........................................................122
Oil Filter, Change ...........................................357
Oil Filter, Selection .........................................357
Oil Pressure Light ..........................................137
Oil, Engine............................................ 357 , 410
Capacity.................................................... 409
Checking................................................... 355
Dipstick .................................................... 355
Disposal ................................................... 357
Filter ................................................ 357 , 410
Filter Disposal ........................................... 357
Identification Logo .................................... 357
Materials Added To .................................. 357
Pressure Warning Light ............................ 137
Recommendation ............................ 357 , 409
Synthetic .................................................. 357
Viscosity ................................................... 409
Onboard Diagnostic System .......................... 142
Operating Precautions .................................. 142
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ........................................ 416
Outside Rearview Mirrors .........................60 , 61
Overheating, Engine ...................................... 343
P
Paint Care
..................................................... 402
Parking Brake ............................................... 151
ParkSense Active Park Assist ........................ 183
ParkSense System, Rear .............................. 175
Passive Entry ...................................................26
Pets .............................................................. 318
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 386
Power
Brakes ...................................................... 405
Inverter ........................................................97
Mirrors .........................................................62
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .................96
Seats ....................................................50 , 52
Steering .................................................... 160
Power Seats
Down ...........................................................50
Forward .......................................................50
Rearward .....................................................50
Up ................................................................50
Power Sliding Door
On / Off Switch .................................. 29 , 104
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 283
Preparation For Jacking ................................ 325
Pretensioners
Seat Belts
................................................. 283
R
Radial Ply Tires .............................................. 391
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............ 368
Radio Operation ............................................ 254
Rear Air Conditioning ................................80 , 86
Rear Camera ................................................. 191
Rear Cross Path ............................................ 265
Rear ParkSense System ................................ 175
Rear Seat Removal ..........................................37
Rear View .........................................................60
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 424
425
Reclining Front Seats
...................................... 36
Recreational Towing ......................................206
Reformulated Gasoline ..................................406
Refrigerant ....................................................359
Release, Hood ...............................................102
Reminder, Lights On ........................................ 68
Reminder, Seat Belt ......................................275
Remote Control
Starting System ........................................... 20
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm
............................................. 23
Disarm The Alarm ........................................ 23
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............. 17
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode
.............................. 21
Remote Starting System .................................. 20
Replacement Bulbs .......................................380
Replacement Tires .........................................393
Reporting Safety Defects ...............................416
Restraints, Child ............................................300
Restraints, Head .............................................. 55
Roof Luggage Rack ........................................113
Rotation, Tires ...............................................400
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .........................318
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......................319
Safety Defects, Reporting ..............................416
Safety Information, Tire ................................ 382
Safety Tips .................................................... 318
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 320
Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 350
Seat Belt Reminder ....................................... 136
Seat Belts ............................................ 275 , 318
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 279
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 279
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage .. 279
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 284
Child Restraints ........................................ 300
Energy Management Feature ................... 284
Extender ................................................... 282
Front Seat...............................275 , 276, 278
Inspection................................................. 318
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 278
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 279
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................. 276
Operating Instructions .............................. 278
Pregnant Women ...................................... 283
Pretensioners ........................................... 283
Rear Seat ................................................. 276
Reminder.................................................. 275
Seat Belt Extender .................................... 282
Seat Belt Pretensioner ............................. 283
Untwisting Procedure ............................... 279
Seat Belts Maintenance ............................... 403
Seats..................................................35 , 50, 54
Adjustment .............................35 , 36, 37, 50
Bench ..........................................................37
Heated .........................................................54
Memory .......................................................33
Power....................................................50 , 52
Rear Folding ................................................35
Reclining ......................................................36
Seatback Release ..........................35 , 36, 37
Stow ‘n Go (Fold in Floor) .............................45
Tilting ....................................................35 , 36
Security Alarm ............................................... 137
Arm The System ...........................................23
Disarm The System ......................................23
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 410
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................18
Service Assistance ........................................ 413
Service Contract ............................................ 415
Service Manuals ........................................... 416
Shifting
Automatic Transmission
........................... 156
Shoulder Belts .............................................. 276
Side View Mirror Adjustment ............................60
Signals, Turn ........................68 , 141, 320, 381
SmartBeams ....................................................69
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 398
Snow Tires .................................................... 394
11
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 425
426
Spare Tire Changing
......................................325
Spare Tire Stowage .......................................333
Spare Tires ................................. 326 , 395, 396
Spark Plugs ...................................................410
Specifications
Oil
..............................................................410
Speed Control
Accel/Decel (ACC Only)
.............................170
Cancel .......................................................165
Resume .....................................................165
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......................165
Starting ...................................................20 , 145
Button ......................................................... 18
Cold Weather ............................................149
Engine Fails To Start .................................149
Remote ....................................................... 20
Starting And Operating ..................................145
Starting Procedures .......................................145
Steering .........................................................160
Tilt Column .................................................. 32
Wheel, Heated ............................................. 32
Wheel, Tilt ................................................... 32
Storage, Vehicle ...............................................88
Stow ‘n Go (Fold In Floor) Seats ....................... 45
Stow ‘n Vac ....................................................108
Stuck, Freeing ...............................................344
Sun Roof .............................................. 100 , 102
Sunglasses Storage .........................................89
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag .... 288
Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 262
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 357
System, Remote Starting .................................20
T
Telescoping Steering Column
..........................32
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .............87
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ................................. 107
Tilt Steering Column ........................................32
Time Delay
Headlight
.....................................................68
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 386
Tire Markings ................................................ 382
Tire Safety Information ................................. 382
Tire Service Kit .............................................. 333
Tire Stowage ................................................. 333
Tires...................................319 , 389, 395, 400
Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................. 393
Air Pressure .............................................. 389
Chains ...................................................... 398
Changing .................................................. 325
Compact Spare ......................................... 395
General Information ........................ 389 , 395
High Speed ............................................... 391
Inflation Pressure ..................................... 390
Jacking.............................................325 , 327
Life Of Tires .............................................. 393
Load Capacity ..................................386 , 387
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ................................125 , 139, 270
Quality Grading ......................................... 400
Radial ....................................................... 391
Replacement ............................................ 393
Rotation .................................................... 400
Safety .............................................. 382 , 389
Sizes ......................................................... 383
Snow Tires ................................................ 394
Spare Tires .............................326 , 395, 396
Spinning ................................................... 392
Trailer Towing ........................................... 203
Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 392
Wheel Nut Torque ..................................... 405
To Open Hood ............................................... 102
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................... 202
Towing........................................................... 197
Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 346
Guide ........................................................ 200
Recreational ............................................. 206
Weight ...................................................... 200
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 426
427
Towing Behind A Motorhome
.........................206
Traction .........................................................207
Traction Control .............................................261
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .............................262
Trailer Towing ................................................197
Hitches ......................................................199
Minimum Requirements ............................202
Tips ...........................................................205
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................202
Wiring ........................................................204
Trailer Towing Guide ......................................200
Trailer Weight ................................................200
Transaxle
Automatic ..................................................154
Operation ..................................................154
Transmission .................................................156
Automatic ........................................ 156 , 370
Maintenance .............................................370
Transporting Pets ..........................................318
Tread Wear Indicators ...................................392
Turn Signals ...................................68 , 141, 381
U
Uconnect
Theater
..................................................... 234
Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With 8.4-Inch Display .... 211
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features
.............26
Passive Entry Programming .........................26
Umbrella Holder ...............................................90
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 400
Unleaded Gasoline ....................................... 406
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................... 279
USB..................................................................94
V
Vacuum
........................................................ 108
Stow ‘n Vac ............................................... 108
Vanity Mirrors ..................................................61
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 405
Vehicle Loading ................................... 195 , 387
Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 356
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ....................10
Vehicle Storage ................................................88
Voice Command ...............................................59
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................59
W
Warranty Information .................................... 415
WARRANTY INFORMATION ..................... 415
Washers, Windshield .................................... 355
Washing Vehicle ............................................ 402
Water
Driving Through ........................................ 207
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........................... 397
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 397
Wind Buffeting .............................................. 100
Window Fogging ...............................................88
Windows ..........................................................98
Power...........................................................98
Windshield Defroster .................................... 318
Windshield Washers ....................... 72 , 73, 355
Fluid.......................................................... 355
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 361
Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 361
Wipers, Intermittent ..................................72 , 73
Wrecker Towing ............................................. 346
11
21_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 427
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that
are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-247-9753 (U.S.)
or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and
Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian
residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury.
FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices,
such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious
accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Chrysler
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Chrysler
brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend
or use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your
judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
PACIFICA
2021 Pacifica
OWNER’S MANUAL
©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada Inc., used under license. Chrysler est une marque
déposée de FCA US LLC ou FCA Canada Inc., utilisée sous le permis. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
Second Edition V1
_RUP_OM_EN_USC
SCAN FOR THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaU. S.
mopar.com/om
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or
scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make
and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only).
